From:
    <Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov>
    A L.
    Date:
    6/30/2008 12A8:07 PM
    Subject:
    here
    it is
    RECEUVED
    CLERK’S
    OFFICE
    see
    page 14 (24th
    page of
    the
    file)
    NOV
    262008
    (See attached file:
    Tech Notes.pdf)
    STATE
    OF
    Pollution
    Control
    8or.d
    7)6V)7/1
    /fS

    From:
    Mike
    McCambridge
    To:
    Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov
    Date:
    6/30/2008
    5:37:42
    PM
    Subject:
    Re: here it is
    Thank
    you for forwarding the reference.
    I have checked the lists of
    discontinued methods,
    those
    recommended
    for further
    use, and those still in
    use. I have noted two apparent discrepancies
    that I hope you can
    clarify.
    First,
    page 15 of Technical Notes indicates
    that Method 245.1 was discontinued
    for mercury, yet page 5 lists Method
    245.1
    from
    Supplement las recommended
    for mercury, and 40 C.F.R. 141 .23(k)(1)
    lists this method for Mercury. Is this
    correct?
    Was
    the shift from
    a
    prior version
    to that in Supplement I?
    Second,
    page
    18
    lists Method 502.2 as discontinued
    for 1,2-dichlorobenzene, yet
    page 8 lists it for use and 40 C.F.R.
    141 .24(e)(1)
    also
    lists
    it for 1,2-dichlorobenzene.
    Is
    the
    appearance on page 18 of Technical
    Notes a typographic error
    that
    should
    have
    listed Method 502.1 as discontinued?
    Please clarify these
    issues to me if you are
    able
    to
    do so. Alternatively, let me know if
    you cannot do so at this time.
    Michael
    J.
    McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution Control Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov>
    6/30/2008 12:42 PM >>>
    see page 14 (24th page of the file)
    (See attached file: Tech Notes.pdf)

    From:
    Mike McCambridge
    To:
    Fair.PatepamaiI.epa.gov
    Date:
    7/1/2008 11:10:39AM
    Subject:
    Re: here it is
    Thanks.
    No great rush.
    Michael J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution
    Control Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Patepamail.epa.gov>
    7/1/2008 6:24 AM >>>
    Mike,
    I’ll check into
    your
    questions,
    but I can’t guarantee that I’ll
    resolve
    them.
    There isn’t any one here who was involved
    in putting Technical
    Notes together,
    so
    I will
    need to do some research. I’ll let
    you
    know
    what
    I find out; it may be next week before I
    get back to you.
    Pat
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridge©ipc
    To
    b.state.il.us>
    Pat
    Fair/Cl/USEPA/US@EPA
    cc
    06/30/2008
    06:37
    PM
    Subject
    Re: here it is
    Thank you for forwarding the reference. I have checked
    the lists of
    discontinued methods,
    those
    recommended for further use, and those still
    in use. I have noted two apparent discrepancies that I hope
    you can
    clarify.
    First,
    page
    15 of Technical Notes indicates that Method
    245.1
    was
    discontinued for mercury, yet page 5 lists Method 245.1 from
    Supplement
    I
    as
    recommended for mercury, and 40 C.F.R. 141
    .23(k)(1) lists this
    method for Mercury. Is this correct? Was the shift from
    a
    prior
    version to that in Supplement I?
    Second, page 18 lists
    Method 502.2
    as
    discontinued
    for
    1,2-dichlorobenzene, yet page 8 lists it for
    use
    and 40
    C.F.R. 141.24
    (e)(1) also lists it for 1 ,2-dichlorobenzene. Is the appearance
    on page
    18 of Technical Notes a
    typographic
    error
    that
    should have listed Method
    502.1
    as
    discontinued?
    Please
    clarify these issues to me if
    you
    are able to
    do so.
    Alternatively, let me know if you cannot do so at this time.
    Michael J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution Control Board
    312-814-6924

    >>> <Fair.Patepamail.ega.Qov>
    6/30/2008
    12:42 PM >>>
    see
    page
    14 (24th
    page of the file)
    (See attached file: Tech Notes.pdf)

    From:
    <Fair.
    Pat@epamail.epa.gov>
    To:
    MCCAMBM©ipcb.state.iI.us
    Date:
    7/1/2008
    2:35:08
    PM
    Subject:
    Re: here
    it is
    Mike,
    I have found the answers
    to your
    questions:
    1. Prior
    to
    the Dec 5,1994
    rule, the citation
    for EPA
    Method 245.1
    (issued
    in 1974) was “Methods
    of Chemical
    Analysis
    of Water
    and Wastes,”
    EPA Environmental
    and
    Monitoring
    and
    Support
    Laboratory,
    Cincinnati, OH
    45268
    (EPA-600/4-79-020).
    March 1983.
    Availablefrom
    ORD Publications,
    CERI, EPA,
    Cincinnati,
    OH 45268.
    The
    method was
    updated to the version
    (Revision
    3.0) that is published
    in “Methods
    for Determination
    of Metals
    in Environmental
    Samples,
    Supplement
    I” (EPA-600/R-94-1
    11) May 1994
    which
    was approved in the Dec
    5, 1994 rule.
    2.
    A
    similar situation exists for
    EPA
    502.2.
    The original
    citation
    was
    “Methods
    for the Determination
    of Organic
    Compounds in Drinking
    Water,”
    ORD
    Publications, CERI,
    EPAI600I4-881039,
    December
    1988. The manual was
    revised in
    July 1991
    and
    the
    methods in the
    revised manual were
    approved
    in the
    Dec 5, 1994 rule. Method
    502.2, Revision
    2.0
    (1989)
    replaced
    Revision
    1.0 (1986).
    Also
    note
    that
    there has
    been another
    change to EPA
    502.2. The version
    that is
    now
    cited is
    Revision 2.1 (1995)
    which is published
    in “Methods
    for
    the Determination
    of Organic Compounds
    in Drinking
    Water, Supplement
    Ill” EPAI600/R-95-131,
    August
    1995.
    The previous version
    was withdrawn
    effective
    June
    1, 2001.
    Hope
    this helps.
    Pat
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridge©ipc
    To
    b.state.il.us>
    Pat
    Fair/CI/USEPAIUS@EPA
    cc
    06/30/2008
    06:37
    PM
    Subject
    Re: here it
    is
    Thank
    you for forwarding the
    reference.
    I have
    checked the
    lists of

    discontinued methods,
    those recommended for further
    use, and those still
    in use. I have noted
    two apparent discrepancies that
    I hope you can
    clarify.
    First,
    page 15 of Technical Notes indicates that
    Method 245.1 was
    discontinued
    for mercury, yet page
    5
    lists Method 245.1
    from Supplement
    las recommended
    for mercury, and 40 C.F.R. 141 .23(k)(1)lists
    this
    method for Mercury.
    Is
    this
    correct? Was the shift from
    a
    prior
    version to that in Supplement I?
    Second,
    page 18 lists Method 502.2
    as
    discontinued
    for
    I ,2-dichlorobenzene, yet
    page 8 lists it for use and 40 C.F.R. 141.24
    (e)(1) also lists it for 1 ,2-dichlorobenzene. Is the
    appearance on page
    18 of Technical Notes
    a typographic error that should have listed Method
    502.1 as discontinued?
    Please
    clarify these issues to me if
    you
    are able to
    do so.
    Alternatively, let me know if
    you cannot do so at this time.
    Michael J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution Control Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov> 6/30/2008 12:42
    PM >>>
    see page
    14 (24th
    page
    of the
    file)
    (See attached file: Tech Notes.pdf)

    From:
    Mike McCam bridge
    To:
    Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov
    Date:
    7/1/2008 2:37:33
    PM
    Subject:
    Re: here it is
    Thank
    you. I will use
    this insight in my review to assure that the Illinois rules comport with
    the
    minimum
    federal
    requirements.
    Michael
    J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution
    Control Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Patepamail.epa.gov>
    7/1/2008 2:34
    PM >>>
    Mike,
    I have
    found
    the
    answers to your questions:
    1. Prior to the
    Dec 5, 1994 rule, the citation for EPA Method
    245.1
    (issued in 1974) was “Methods
    of Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes,”
    EPA Environmental
    and Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati,
    OH
    45268 (EPA-600/4-79-020). March 1983.
    Available from ORD Publications,
    CERI, EPA, Cincinnati,
    OH 45268. The method was updated to the version
    (Revision 3.0) that is published in “Methods
    for Determination of Metals
    in Environmental
    Samples, Supplement I” (EPA-600/R-94-111) May 1994
    which was approved in the Dec
    5,
    1994
    rule.
    2. A similar situation exists for EPA
    502.2. The original citation was
    “Methods for the Determination of Organic
    Compounds
    in Drinking Water,”
    ORD Publications,
    CERI, EPA’600/4-88/039, December 1988. The manual was
    revised in July 1991 and the methods
    in
    the
    revised manual were approved
    in the Dec 5, 1994 rule. Method 502.2, Revision 2.0 (1989)
    replaced
    Revision 1.0(1986).
    Also note that there has been another change to EPA 502.2.
    The version
    that
    is now
    cited
    is Revision 2.1 (1995) which is published in “Methods
    for the Determination of Organic Compounds
    in
    Drinking Water,
    Supplement
    Ill” EPA/600/R-95-131, August 1995. The previous version was withdrawn
    effective
    June
    1, 2001.
    Hope
    this
    helps.
    Pat
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridgeipc
    To
    b.state.il.us>
    Pat
    Fair/Cl/USEPAIUS@EPA
    cc
    06/30/2008
    06:37
    PM
    Subject
    Re: here it is
    Thank you
    for
    forwarding the reference. I have checked the
    lists of
    discontinued methods,
    those
    recommended for further use, and those still
    in use.
    I have noted two apparent discrepancies that I hope
    you can
    clarify.

    First,
    page 15 of
    Technical Notes
    indicates that
    Method 245.1
    was
    discontinued
    for mercury,
    yet page 5
    lists
    Method 245.1
    from Supplement
    I as
    recommended
    for
    mercury, and
    40 C.F.R. 141
    .23(k)(1)
    lists
    this
    method for
    Mercury.
    Is
    this
    correct? Was
    the shift
    from a prior
    version
    to that in
    Supplement
    I?
    Second,
    page
    18 lists
    Method 502.2
    as
    discontinued
    for
    1,2-dichlorobenzene,
    yet
    page 8 lists it
    for
    use
    and
    40 C.F.R.
    141.24
    (e)(1)
    also lists
    it for 1 ,2-dichlorobenzene.
    Is
    the appearance
    on
    page
    18 of Technical
    Notes
    a
    typographic
    error that should
    have listed
    Method
    502.1
    as
    discontinued?
    Please
    clarify these
    issues to
    me if
    you are able
    to do so.
    Alternatively,
    let
    me know
    if
    you cannot
    do so
    at this
    time.
    Michael
    J.
    McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution
    Control
    Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Pat(äeoamail.ea.gov>
    6/30/2008
    12:42 PM >>>
    see
    page 14 (24th
    page of the
    file)
    (See
    attached
    file:
    Tech Notespdf)

    From:
    <Fair.
    Pat©epamail.epa.gov>
    To:
    MCCAMBM@ipcb.state.il.us
    Date:
    7/1/2008
    2:40:12 PM
    Subject:
    Re:
    here it is
    Are
    you adding references
    to the new appendix that
    includes optional
    alternative methods?
    Just
    curious...
    “Mike
    McCam bridge”
    <mccambridgeipc
    To
    b.state.il.us>
    Pat
    Fair/Cl/USEPAIUS@EPA
    cc
    07/01/2008 03:37
    PM
    Subject
    Re:
    here it is
    Thank you. I will use this insight in
    my review to assure that the
    Illinois rules
    comport with the minimum federal
    requirements.
    Michael J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution Control Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov>
    7/1/2008 2:34 PM >>>
    Mike,
    have
    found the answers
    to your questions:
    1. Prior
    to the Dec
    5,
    1994
    rule, the citation for EPA Method
    245.1
    (issued in 1974) was “Methods of
    Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes,”
    EPA
    Environmental
    and Monitoring and Support Laboratory,
    Cincinnati, OH
    45268 (EPA-600/4-79-020).
    March 1983. Available from ORD
    Publications,
    CERI, EPA, Cincinnati, OH 45268. The
    method
    was updated to the version
    (Revision 3.0)
    that
    is published in “Methods for Determination
    of Metals
    in
    Environmental Samples,
    Supplement I” (EPA-600/R-94-1
    11) May 1994
    which was approved in the Dec
    5,
    1994
    rule.
    2. A
    similar situation exists for
    EPA 502.2. The original citation
    was
    “Methods
    for the Determination
    of Organic
    Compounds in Drinking Water,”
    ORD Publications, CERI, EPA/600/4-88/039,
    December 1988.
    The manual was
    revised
    in July 1991 and the
    methods in the revised
    manual were approved
    in the Dec 5, 1994 rule. Method 502.2,
    Revision 2.0 (1989) replaced

    Revision
    1.0
    (1986).
    Also
    note that there
    has been another
    change to
    EPA
    502.2. The version
    that
    is now cited is
    Revision
    2.1 (1995)
    which is published
    in “Methods
    for the
    Determination
    of Organic
    Compounds in Drinking
    Water, Supplement
    Ill’ EPA1600/R-95-131,
    August 1995.
    The previous
    version
    was
    withdrawn
    effective June
    1, 2001.
    Hope
    this helps.
    Pat
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridgeipc
    To
    b.state.il.us>
    Pat
    Fair/Cl/USEPA/US@EPA
    cc
    06/30/2008
    06:37
    PM
    Subject
    Re:
    here it is
    Thank
    you for
    forwarding
    the reference. I have
    checked the lists
    of
    discontinued
    methods, those
    recommended
    for further use, and those
    still
    in use. I have noted
    two
    apparent discrepancies
    that
    I hope you
    can
    clarify.
    First,
    page 15 of Technical Notes
    indicates that
    Method 245.1 was
    discontinued
    for mercury, yet
    page 5 lists Method
    245.1 from
    Supplement
    I as recommended
    for mercury,
    and 40 C.F.R.
    141 .23(k)(1)lists this
    method for
    Mercury. Is this correct?
    Was the shift
    from
    a
    prior
    version
    to that in Supplement
    I?
    Second,
    page 18 lists Method
    502.2 as discontinued
    for
    1
    ,2-dichlorobenzene,
    yet page
    8 lists it for use and
    40 C.F.R. 141.24
    (e)(1)
    also lists it for 1 ,2-dichlorobenzene.
    Is the
    appearance on page
    18 of Technical
    Notes
    a
    typographic
    error that should
    have listed
    Method
    502.1 as
    discontinued?
    Please clarify these
    issues to me if you are
    able to
    do so.
    Alternatively,
    let
    me
    know
    if
    you
    cannot
    do so at this time.
    Michael
    J.
    McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution Control
    Board
    312-814-6924

    >>> <Fair.PatepamaiI.epa.gov>
    6/30/2008
    12:42 PM >>>
    see page 14 (24th
    page of the file)
    (See attached
    file: Tech Notes.pdf)

    From:
    Mike
    McCambridge
    To:
    Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov
    Date:
    7/1/2008
    2:59:32
    PM
    Subject:
    Re: here
    it is
    I am uncertain
    how best to
    deal
    with
    the appendix
    listing of alternative
    methods.
    It is possible
    that
    the listing itself
    may
    be
    added to the Illinois rules
    as an appendix.
    It is also
    possible
    that
    references in the
    various federally
    derived provisions
    that
    restrict
    the
    selection
    of methods
    (i.e., the State
    counterparts to 40 C.F.R.
    141.23(e)(1),
    141.24(k)(1),
    etc.) will
    require a
    reference to
    the
    listing of alternative methods.
    I should have
    a clearer
    picture
    as I continue my work
    on
    the
    proposal, after
    I
    have
    dealt
    with the USEPA March
    12, 2007 amendments.
    Michael J.
    McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution
    Control
    Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov>
    7/1/2008 2:39
    PM >>>
    Are
    you
    adding references
    to the new appendix
    that
    includes
    optional
    alternative
    methods? Just curious...
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridgeipc
    To
    b.state.il.us>
    Pat
    Fair/Cl/USEPAIUS@EPA
    cc
    07/01/2008 03:37
    PM
    Subject
    Re: here
    it is
    Thank
    you.
    I will
    use this
    insight
    in my review to assure that
    the
    Illinois rules comport with
    the minimum federal requirements.
    Michael
    J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution Control Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Pattä.eamaiI.epa.gov>
    7/1/2008
    2:34 PM
    >>>
    Mike,
    I have found the answers
    to your questions:
    1.
    Prior to the Dec 5, 1994 rule,
    the citation for EPA Method
    245.1
    (issued in 1974)
    was
    “Methods
    of
    Chemical
    Analysis of Water and Wastes,”
    EPA Environmental
    and Monitoring
    and Support
    Laboratory,
    Cincinnati, OH
    45268 (EPA-600/4-79-020).
    March 1983. Available
    from
    ORD
    Publications,
    CERI,
    EPA,
    Cincinnati, OH 45268.
    The method was updated
    to the version
    (Revision 3.0)
    that is published
    in “Methods
    for Determination of Metals
    in Environmental
    Samples, Supplement
    I” (EPA-600/R-94-1
    11) May
    1994
    which was
    approved in the Dec
    5, 1994 rule.
    2. A similar
    situation exists for EPA
    502.2.
    The original
    citation was
    “Methods for the
    Determination
    of
    Organic Compounds
    in Drinking
    Water,”
    ORD
    Publications,
    CERI, EPAI600/4-88/039,
    December 1988.
    The manual was
    revised in July 1991 and
    the methods
    in the
    revised manual
    were
    approved

    in the Dec
    5, 1994 rule. Method 502.2,
    Revision 2.0 (1989) replaced
    Revision 1.0 (1986).
    Also note that
    there
    has been another
    change to EPA 502.2. The version
    that is now
    cited
    is Revision 2.1 (1995) which
    is published in “Methods
    for the Determination
    of
    Organic
    Compounds in Drinking
    Water, Supplement
    Ill”
    EPAJ600/R-95-131, August
    1995. The previous version
    was
    withdrawn
    effective
    June 1,2001.
    Hope this helps.
    Pat
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridgeipc
    To
    b.state.il.us>
    Pat
    Fair/CI/USEPNUS@EPA
    cc
    06/30/2008 06:37
    PM
    Subject
    Re: here it is
    Thank you for forwarding the reference.
    I
    have
    checked
    the lists of
    discontinued
    methods, those recommended for further
    use, and those still
    in
    use. I
    have noted two apparent
    discrepancies that I hope
    you
    can
    clarify.
    First,
    page
    15
    of
    Technical Notes indicates
    that
    Method 245.1 was
    discontinued for mercury, yet page 5 lists Method 245.1
    from Supplement
    I as recommended for
    mercury,
    and 40 C.F.R. 141 .23(k)(1) lists this
    method for Mercury. Is this correct? Was the shift
    from a prior
    version to that in
    Supplement
    I?
    Second, page 18 lists
    Method
    502.2 as discontinued for
    1 ,2-dichlorobenzene, yet page 8 lists it for
    use and 40 C.F.R. 141.24
    (e)(1) also
    lists
    it for 1
    ,2-dichlorobenzene.
    Is the appearance on
    page
    18 of Technical Notes a typographic error that should have
    listed Method
    502.1 as
    discontinued?
    Please
    clarify these issues to me if
    you are able to do so.
    Alternatively, let me know if you cannot do so at this time.
    Michael
    J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution Control Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Patepamail.epa.gov>
    6/30/2008 12:42 PM >>>
    see page
    14(24th
    page of the file)
    (See attached file:
    Tech Notes.pdf)

    From:
    Mike
    McCambrdge
    To:
    Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov
    Date:
    7/8/2008
    12:57:19
    PM
    Subject:
    Waters
    Methods
    I have tried
    to obtain
    copies
    of the two Waters
    methods
    referenced
    in 40 C.F.R.
    141.23(k)(1)
    for fluoride
    and nitrite/nitrate
    using
    the contact
    information
    included
    in the
    rule. At first,
    the Waters
    rep could
    not
    locate
    anything
    based
    on
    the
    EPA
    descriptions
    included
    in the
    rule. This
    morning I received
    two documents
    that
    purport to
    be the
    methods.
    The documents
    raise
    questions
    that you
    might
    answer
    for
    me.
    The
    copy of Method
    B-i
    011
    sent
    me by Waters
    is nearly
    identical
    to one
    that
    found
    on
    the USEPA
    website.
    The only
    difference
    between the
    two is that the
    method from
    the USEPA website
    is headed
    “Waters.”
    The document
    it appears
    to
    include
    pages 13
    through 17 from
    some reference.
    It is undated,
    which
    means
    that
    I cannot
    use it for
    an
    incorporation
    by
    reference. Do
    you
    have
    a
    dated copy of
    Method B-i 011
    or
    a
    fuller copy
    of
    the
    posted
    reference
    that would
    include the
    date?
    It appears
    that the method
    is just one
    cited out of
    a
    fuller reference,
    and
    I should cite
    to that
    fuller reference
    by its
    own title.
    I
    will
    also approach
    Waters
    with
    this request.
    Your
    rule cites “Waters
    Method
    D6508, Rev. 2,”
    entitled “Test
    Method for
    Determination
    of
    Dissolved
    Inorganic
    Anions in
    Aqueous Matrices
    Using
    Capillary
    Ion Electrophoresis
    and
    Chromate
    Electrolyte.”
    Waters sent
    me
    a document
    marked
    “Method
    6500,” “revision
    0,”
    and dated
    February
    2007,” and entitled
    “Dissolved
    Inorganic
    Anions
    In Aqueous
    Matrices
    By
    Capillary
    Ion Electrophoresis.”
    That document
    appears to
    be Method 6500
    from SW-846.
    Is
    “Waters
    Method D6508,
    Rev.
    2”
    the same
    as
    Method
    6500,
    rev.
    0 from
    SW-846?
    If
    so,
    why did
    USEPA cite
    this
    as
    “D6508”?
    If not, can
    you
    forward
    me
    a copy
    of Method
    D6508
    or
    give
    me enough information
    to identify
    the method
    to Waters,
    that I might
    obtain
    a
    copy of the
    right method?
    Michael
    J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution
    Control
    Board
    312-814-6924

    Page 1
    of2
    Mike
    McCambridge
    - Re: Waters
    Methods
    From:
    <Fair.Patepamail.epa.gov>
    To:
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridgeipcb.state.il.us>
    Date:
    7/8/2008
    2:19 PM
    Subject:
    Re: Waters
    Methods
    Mike,
    I’m
    working
    off
    site
    today,
    so
    I
    don’t have
    access to
    the references
    I need
    to
    answer
    your
    questions.
    I should
    have copies
    of the
    methods
    that were
    added to
    40 CFR
    141
    as part of
    the 2007
    methods
    update
    rule. If these
    Waters
    methods
    are prior
    to that,
    I might
    not be
    able
    to help
    you.
    Unfortunately,
    I don’t
    know
    who
    might
    have
    them
    other
    than Waters.
    I’ll see what
    I can find
    tomorrow
    and
    get back
    to
    you.
    Pat
    11
    Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridge@ipcb.state.iLus>
    wrote:
    To: Pat
    Fair/CI/USEPA/US@EPA
    From:
    “Mike McCambridge”
    <mccambridge@ipcb.state.il.us>
    Date:
    07/08/2008
    01:57PM
    Subject:
    Waters
    Methods
    I have
    tried to
    obtain
    copies
    of
    the two
    Waters
    methods
    referenced
    in
    40 C.F.R.
    141.23(k)
    (1)
    for
    fluoride
    and
    nitrite/nitrate
    using
    the
    contact
    information
    included
    in
    the
    rule.
    At
    first,
    the
    Waters
    rep
    could
    not locate
    anything
    based
    on
    the EPA
    descriptions
    included
    in
    the
    rule.
    This
    morning
    I
    received
    two
    documents
    that
    purport
    to
    be
    the
    methods.
    The
    documents
    raise
    questions
    that
    you
    might
    answer
    for
    me.
    The
    copy of
    Method
    B-lOll
    sent
    me
    by Waters
    is nearly
    identical
    to
    one
    that
    I
    found
    on the
    USEPA
    website.
    The
    only difference
    between
    the
    two
    is that
    the
    method
    from
    the
    [JSEPA
    website
    is headed
    “Waters.”
    The
    document
    it
    appears
    to
    include
    pages
    13 through
    17
    from some
    reference.
    It is
    undated,
    which
    means that
    I cannot
    use
    it
    for an
    incorporation
    by
    reference.
    Do
    you
    have
    a dated
    copy
    of
    Method
    B-lOll
    or a fuller
    copy
    of
    the
    posted
    reference
    that
    would
    include
    the
    date?
    It
    appears
    that
    the method
    is just
    one
    cited
    out
    of a
    fuller
    reference,
    and I should
    cite
    to
    that fuller
    reference
    by
    its
    own title.
    I will
    also
    approach
    Waters
    with
    this
    request.
    Your
    rule cites
    “Waters
    Method
    D6508,
    Rev.
    2,”
    entitled
    “Test
    Method
    for
    Determination
    of Dissolved
    Inorganic
    Anions
    in Aqueous
    Matrices
    Using
    Capillary
    Ion Electrophoresis
    and
    Chromate
    Electrolyte.”
    Waters
    sent
    me
    a document
    marked
    “Method
    6500,”
    “revision
    0,”
    and
    dated
    February
    2007,”
    and
    entitled
    “Dissolved
    Inorganic
    Anions
    In
    Aqueous
    Matrices
    By
    Capillary
    Ion
    Electrophoresis.”
    That
    document
    file
    ://C :\Documents
    and Settings\McCambM\Local
    Settings\Temp\GW}
    00002.HTM
    11/26/2008

    Page 2
    of2
    appears
    to be
    Method
    6500
    from
    SW-846.
    Is
    T
    Waters
    Method
    1D6508,
    Rev.
    2T
    the same
    as Method
    6500,
    rev.
    0 from
    SW-846?
    If
    so, why
    did
    USEPA cite
    this as
    “D6508’
    T
    ?
    If not,
    can
    you
    forward
    me a copy
    of
    Method D6508
    or give
    me enough
    information
    to identify
    the method
    to
    Waters,
    that
    I might
    obtain a
    copy of the
    right method?
    Michael
    J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution
    Control Board
    312-814-6924
    file://C
    :\Documents
    and Settings\McCambM\Local
    Settings\Temp\GW} 00002.HTM
    11/26/2008

    From:
    Mike
    McCambridge
    To:
    Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov
    Date:
    7/8/2008
    2:29:21 PM
    Subject:
    Re: Waters
    Methods
    Whatever
    you can do for me
    when you get back.
    I have continued to
    look into this today.
    I am convinced that Method
    6500 added
    to SW-846
    in Update
    IV in the end
    of 2007 is the method
    you have called “Method
    D6508”
    from
    Waters.
    See 73 Fed.
    Reg. 486
    (Jan.
    3,
    2008);
    http://v,ww.eoa.govISW-846/rjdfs/6500.pdf.
    If this
    is
    true,
    I will likely cite the SW-846
    version
    of
    the method,
    since
    it
    is much easier to obtain
    than
    the method
    from Waters. As
    described,
    Waters
    initially acted like I spoke
    a foreign language
    when
    I
    asked
    for ‘Method D6508.”
    As for Method B-i
    Oil,
    it
    seems to distill down
    to
    me needing
    the
    title to the document in
    which
    the
    method
    appears.
    Talk to you when you return.
    Michael J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution Control Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Pat1epamaiI.epa.gov>
    7/8/2008
    2:18 PM >>>
    Mike,
    I’m working off site today,
    so I don’t have
    access to the references
    I need to answer your
    questions.
    I should
    have copies
    of the
    methods that were
    added to 40 CFR
    141
    as part of the
    2007 methods update
    rule. If these Waters
    methods
    are
    prior
    to
    that, I
    might not be able to help
    you. Unfortunately, I
    don’t know who
    might
    have them other than Waters.
    I’ll see
    what I can find tomorrow
    and
    get back to
    you.
    Pat
    “Mike McCambridge”
    <mccambrideCtipcb.state.il.us>
    wrote:
    To:
    Pat
    Fair/CI/USEPA/US@EPA
    From: “Mike McCambridge”
    <mccambrideäicb.state.iI.us>
    Date: 07/08/2008 01 :57PM
    Subject: Waters
    Methods
    I have tried to obtain
    copies of the two Waters
    methods referenced
    in 40
    C.F.R. 141
    .23(k)(i) for fluoride
    and
    nitrite/nitrate
    using
    the
    contact information
    included
    in the rule. At first, the Waters
    rep could not locate
    anything
    based
    on the EPA descriptions
    included
    in the rule. This morning
    I
    received two
    documents
    that purport to
    be
    the methods.
    The
    documents raise questions
    that you
    might
    answer for
    me.
    The copy
    of Method
    B-loll sent me by Waters
    is nearly identical
    to one that I found on
    the
    USEPA website.
    The only
    difference
    between
    the two is that the method
    from the
    USEPA
    website is headed “Waters.”
    The document it
    appears to
    include
    pages
    13
    through 17 from
    some
    reference. It is undated,
    which means that
    I cannot use it for an incorporation
    by reference.
    Do
    you have
    a
    dated copy
    of Method B-loll or a fuller
    copy
    of the posted
    reference that would include
    the date? It appears
    that the
    method
    is
    just one
    cited out of
    a
    fuller
    reference, and I should cite
    to
    that fuller
    reference
    by its own title. I will
    also approach Waters
    with
    this
    request.
    Your rule
    cites
    “Waters
    Method D6508, Rev. 2,” entitled
    “Test Method
    for Determination
    of
    Dissolved
    Inorganic Anions
    in Aqueous
    Matrices Using Capillary
    Ion Electrophoresis
    and Chromate Electrolyte.”
    Waters sent
    me a document
    marked “Method 6500,”
    “revision
    0,” and dated February
    2007,” and entitled “Dissolved
    Inorganic Anions
    In Aqueous
    Matrices By Capillary Ion
    Electrophoresis.” That
    document appears
    to be Method 6500 from
    SW-846. Is “Waters
    Method D6508,
    Rev. 2” the same
    as
    Method
    6500, rev. 0 from SW-846?
    If
    so,
    why did
    USEPA
    cite this as “D6508”? If
    not,
    can you forward
    me
    a copy of
    Method
    D6508 or
    give
    me
    enough information to identify
    the method to Waters,
    that I might obtain
    a copy of the right method?
    Michael J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution Control Board
    312-814-6924

    From:
    <Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov>
    To:
    MCCAMBM©ipcb.state.iI.us
    Date:
    7/10/2008
    7:46:26
    AM
    Subject:
    Re:
    Waters
    Methods
    Mike,
    Here’s
    Waters
    6508
    method
    that
    was
    approved
    for drinking water. Aren’t
    you
    limited to
    methods that
    are
    listed as
    approved
    for drinking water?
    Based
    on the info at
    the top of the
    method,
    I’m
    guessing this
    may
    now be
    an ASTM
    method.
    t was
    evaluated
    under
    the ATP program,
    so
    EPA
    was
    given the method
    prior to the
    ASTM process.
    I don’t know this
    for sure
    and it will be something
    I investigate
    as we
    begin putting together
    our
    next Expedited
    Methods Approval
    FR action.
    (If it is the same
    method,
    we’ll probably
    list it
    in Appendix
    A.)
    (See attached
    file: Waters
    Method
    D
    6508,
    Rev
    2_EPA-HQ-OW-2003-0070-0063
    .pdf)
    As for the
    other method, it was
    approved prior to
    the
    2007 methods
    rule.
    I don’t have
    a
    copy
    of
    it,
    because
    I wasn’t
    involved
    in the earlier
    methods
    rules. However, I have
    asked our ATP
    coordinator to
    see if it
    is in the ATP file.
    When
    I hear
    back from
    him,
    I’ll let you know.
    Hope this helps,
    Pat
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridgeipc
    To
    b.state.il.us>
    Pat
    Fair/Cl/USEPAIUS@EPA
    cc
    07/08/2008
    03:29
    PM
    Subject
    Re: Waters Methods
    Whatever
    you can do for me when
    you
    get
    back.
    I have continued to
    look
    into
    this today.
    I am convinced
    that Method
    6500 added to SW-846
    in
    Update IV
    in
    the end of 2007 is the
    method
    you
    have called “Method
    D6508”
    from
    Waters. See 73
    Fed. Reg. 486
    (Jan. 3, 2008);
    http://www.epa.gov/SW-846/pdfs/6500.pdf.
    If this
    is true,
    I will
    likely
    cite the
    SW-846
    version
    of
    the
    method,
    since it
    is much easier to obtain
    than the method
    from Waters. As
    described, Waters
    initially acted
    like
    I
    spoke
    a
    foreign
    language when
    I asked for “Method
    D6508.”
    As for

    Method
    B-i Dli, it
    seems to distill down
    to me needing
    the title to
    the
    document
    in which
    the
    method appears.
    Talk to
    you
    when
    you return.
    Michael
    J.
    McCam
    bridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution Control
    Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov>
    7/8/2008
    2:18
    PM >>>
    Mike,
    I’m
    working off
    site today,
    so
    I don’t have
    access
    to the references
    I
    need to answer
    your questions.
    I
    should have copies
    of the methods that
    were
    added to
    40 CFR 141
    as
    part of the 2007
    methods update rule.
    If
    these Waters methods
    are prior to
    that,
    I might
    not be able to help
    you.
    Unfortunately,
    I don’t know who
    might have them other
    than
    Waters.
    I’ll
    see what I can
    find tomorrow
    and get back to
    you.
    Pat
    “Mike McCambridge”
    <mccambridge©ipcb.state.il.us>
    wrote:
    To: Pat
    Fair/Cl/USEPAIUS@EPA
    From:
    “Mike McCambridge”
    <mccambridgeipcb.state.il.us>
    Date: 07/08/2008
    01 :57PM
    Subject:
    Waters Methods
    I have
    tried to obtain
    copies of the two Waters
    methods referenced
    in 40
    C.F.R. 141 .23(k)(1) for fluoride
    and
    nitrite/nitrate
    using
    the
    contact
    information
    included
    in the rule. At first, the
    Waters
    rep could
    not
    locate anything based on
    the EPA
    descriptions
    included
    in the rule.
    This morning I received
    two
    documents that
    purport to be
    the methods.
    The
    documents raise questions
    that
    you
    might answer for
    me.
    The
    copy of Method B-i
    011 sent me
    by
    Waters is nearly identical
    to
    one
    that I
    found on the USEPA website.
    The only
    difference
    between the two
    is that the method from
    the USEPA website
    is headed “Waters.”
    The
    document
    it appears to include
    pages 13 through
    17
    from
    some reference.
    It is
    undated,
    which means
    that I cannot
    use
    it
    for an incorporation
    by
    reference.
    Do
    you
    have a dated
    copy of Method
    B-loll
    or a fuller copy
    of
    the posted reference
    that would include the
    date? It appears
    that
    the
    method
    is just
    one
    cited out
    of a fuller reference,
    and
    I should
    cite
    to that fuller reference
    by its own
    title.
    I will also approach
    Waters with this request.
    Your rule cites “Waters
    Method D6508,
    Rev. 2,” entitled
    “Test Method for
    Determination
    of Dissolved Inorganic Anions
    in Aqueous
    Matrices
    Using
    Capillary
    Ion Electrophoresis
    and
    Chromate Electrolyte.”
    Waters sent me
    a
    document marked
    “Method 6500,” “revision
    0,” and
    dated
    February
    2007,”
    and
    entitled “Dissolved
    Inorganic
    Anions
    In Aqueous
    Matrices By
    Capillary Ion Electrophoresis.”
    That
    document appears
    to
    be
    Method
    6500
    from
    SW-846. Is “Waters
    Method
    D6508,
    Rev. 2” the
    same as Method
    6500,

    rev. 0 from
    SW-846?
    If so, why
    did USEPA
    cite
    this
    as “D6508”?
    If not,
    can
    you
    forward me
    a
    copy of
    Method
    D6508
    or
    give me enough
    information
    to identify
    the
    method
    to Waters,
    that
    I might obtain
    a copy
    of the
    right method?
    Michael
    J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution
    Control
    Board
    312-814-6924

    From:
    Mike
    McCambridge
    To:
    Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov
    Date:
    7/10/2008
    5:07:33 PM
    Subject:
    Re: Waters Methods
    Thank you. That
    nails it down.
    I
    will cite it
    as an ASTM
    method.
    I have
    another
    method problem. I
    have been trying to obtain
    a copy of that
    Ra-226/Ra-228 method
    by gamma-ray
    spectometry developed
    by Georgia Insitute of
    Technology. The
    “Environmental Resources
    Center” has been disbanned
    or
    something,
    so
    that
    the
    number at
    40 C.F.R.
    141.74
    is no longer valid. It may
    have
    become
    the
    Environmental
    Radiation
    Center
    or
    something.
    I have placed several
    calls and e-mails with
    Bernd Kahn
    and
    the
    Center in an attmpt to locate
    the
    method,
    but
    no luck so far.
    Can you help on
    this one too?
    Michael J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution Control Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Pat@epamail.epa.gov>
    7/10/2008
    7:43 AM >>>
    Mike,
    Here’s Waters
    6508 method that was approved
    for drinking
    water. Aren’t
    you
    limited
    to methods that
    are
    listed
    as approved for
    drinking
    water?
    Based on the info
    at the top of the method,
    I’m guessing this may
    now be
    an ASTM
    method. It was
    evaluated
    under the ATP
    program, so EPA was
    given the method prior to
    the ASTM process.
    I don’t know this for sure
    and it
    will be something I investigate
    as we
    begin
    putting
    together our
    next Expedited Methods Approval
    FR action. (If
    it is the
    same
    method,
    we’ll probably
    list it in Appendix A.)
    (See
    attached
    file:
    Waters Method
    D 6508, Rev
    2_EPA-HQ-OW-2003-0070-0063.pdf)
    As for
    the other method, it was approved
    prior to the
    2007 methods rule.
    I don’t have
    a
    copy
    of it, because I wasn’t involved
    in the earlier
    methods rules.
    However,
    I have
    asked our ATP coordinator
    to
    see if it
    is in the ATP file. When
    I hear back from him,
    I’ll let you know.
    Hope this
    helps,
    Pat
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridgeipc
    To
    b.state.il.us>
    Pat
    Fair/Cl/USEPAIUS@EPA
    cc
    07/08/2008
    03:29
    PM
    Subject
    Re:
    Waters
    Methods
    Whatever you
    can do for me when
    you get back. I
    have continued to look
    into this today.
    I am
    convinced
    that Method
    6500 added to SW-846 in
    Update
    IV in the end of 2007 is
    the
    method
    you have
    called “Method

    D6508” from Waters.
    See
    73
    Fed. Reg. 486
    (Jan.
    3,
    2008):
    http://www.epa.gov/SW-846/pdfs/6500.pdf.
    If this is true, I will likely
    cite the SW-846 version
    of the method, since it
    is much easier to obtain
    than the method from Waters.
    As described, Waters initially acted
    like
    I
    spoke a foreign language when
    I asked for “Method D6508.” As for
    Method
    B-lOll, it seems to distill down to
    me needing the title to the
    document
    in
    which the method
    appears.
    Talk to you when you return.
    Michael
    J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution Control Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Pategamail.ega.gov>
    7/8/2008
    2:18 PM >>>
    Mike,
    I’m working
    off
    site today,
    so I don’t have access to the references
    I
    need to answer your questions. I should
    have copies of the methods that
    were
    added
    to 40 CFR 141
    as part of the 2007 methods update
    rule. If
    these
    Waters methods are prior to that, I
    might not be able to help you.
    Unfortunately, I don’t know who
    might have them other than Waters.
    I’ll see what I can find tomorrow and
    get back to you.
    Pat
    “Mike McCambridge’
    <mccambridoeipcb.state.il.us> wrote:
    To: Pat
    Fair/CI/USEPNUS@EPA
    From: “Mike McCambridge” <mccambridgeipcb.state.il.us>
    Date:
    07/08/2008 01 :57PM
    Subject: Waters Methods
    I have tried to obtain copies of the two Waters methods referenced
    in 40
    C.F.R.
    141 .23(k)(1)for fluoride
    and nitrite/nitrate using the contact
    information included in the rule. At first, the Waters
    rep could not
    locate anything
    based on
    the
    EPA descriptions included in the rule.
    This morning I received two documents that
    purport to be the methods.
    The documents raise questions that you might answer for me.
    The copy
    of Method B-i 011 sent me by Waters is nearly identical to
    one
    that
    I found on the USEPA website. The only
    difference between the two
    is that the method from the USEPA website is headed “Waters.” The
    document it appears to include pages 13 through
    17 from some reference.
    It is
    undated, which
    means
    that
    I cannot use it for an incorporation
    by
    reference. Do you have a dated copy of Method B-i 011
    or a fuller copy
    of the
    posted reference that would
    include the date? It appears that
    the method is just one cited out of a fuller reference, and
    I should
    cite
    to that fuller reference
    by
    its own title.
    I will also approach
    Waters
    with this request.
    Your rule cites “Waters Method D6508, Rev. 2,” entitled “Test
    Method for
    Determination of
    Dissolved
    Inorganic
    Anions in Aqueous Matrices Using
    Capillary Ion Electrophoresis and Chromate Electrolyte.” Waters
    sent me
    a
    document marked “Method 6500,” “revision 0,’ and dated February
    2007,”
    and
    entitled “Dissolved Inorganic Anions
    In Aqueous Matrices By
    Capillary Ion Electrophoresis.” That document appears to
    be Method 6500
    from SW-846. Is “Waters
    Method
    D6508, Rev. 2” the same as Method
    6500,
    rev. 0 from
    SW-846?
    If
    so, why did USEPA cite this
    as ‘D6508”? If not,
    can you forward me
    a
    copy of Method D6508 or give me
    enough information
    to identify the method to
    Waters, that
    I might obtain a copy of the
    right method?
    Michael
    J.
    McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution Control
    Board
    312-814-6924

    Page 1 of5
    Mike
    McCambridge
    - Re:
    Waters
    Methods
    From:
    <Fair.Patepamai1.epa.gov>
    To:
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridgeipcb.state.i1.us>
    Date:
    7/10/2008
    9:31
    PM
    Subject:
    Re: Waters
    Methods
    Mike,
    I
    haven’t
    done
    a one-to-one
    check
    of
    the
    ASTM
    method
    against
    the
    Waters
    method,
    so I
    can’t say
    for
    sure that
    they are
    the
    same.
    My
    comment was
    meant
    to let you
    know that
    I would do
    that
    BEFORE
    we issue
    the
    next
    set of method
    approvals.
    If they
    are
    the same
    or only
    have
    insignificant
    differences,
    then
    we will include
    the
    ASTM
    method
    as
    an approved
    method.
    Legally,
    it won’t
    be
    an
    approved
    drinking
    water
    method
    until
    we
    publish
    a notice
    in
    the Federal
    Register.
    It’s my opinion
    that
    if the Waters
    methods
    aren’t
    easily available
    from
    Waters, then
    you
    can
    easily
    justify not
    including
    them in your
    state
    regulations.
    Our
    ATP coordinator
    wasn’t
    able
    to
    find
    a
    copy
    of the
    nitrate/nitrite
    method
    in his
    files.
    However,
    he
    is still checking
    on
    it.
    I
    have
    the
    GA Tech method.
    I
    can email
    it to
    you
    on Monday.
    If you
    need it before
    then,
    you
    can
    go
    to the e-docket
    for
    the 2007
    Methods
    Update
    Rule.
    I know the
    method
    is in the docket,
    because
    I
    put
    it there and
    it is available
    for
    download
    through
    the docket
    site.
    I
    wilIsee
    if I can
    find
    out how
    we
    should
    be
    referencing
    the GA Tech
    method.
    I thought
    our
    information
    was correct
    when
    we
    went final
    on the rule.
    Hope this
    helps.
    Pat
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridge@ipcb.state.il.us>
    wrote:
    To: Pat
    Fair/CI/USEPA/US@EPA
    From:
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridge@ipcb.state.il.us>
    Date:
    07/10/2008
    06:O7PM
    Subject:
    Re:
    Waters Methods
    Thank
    you.
    That nails
    it down.
    I
    will cite
    it
    as
    an ASTM
    method.
    I
    have
    another
    method
    problem.
    I
    have
    been
    trying
    to
    obtain
    a
    copy
    of
    that
    Ra-226/Ra-228
    method
    by
    gamma-ray
    spectometry
    developed
    by
    Georgia
    Insitute
    of Technology.
    The
    “Environmental
    Resources
    Center”
    has
    been
    disbanned
    or
    something,
    so
    that the
    number
    at
    40
    C.F.R.
    141.74
    is
    no
    longer
    valid.
    It
    may have
    become
    the
    Environmental Radiation
    Center
    or
    something.
    I
    have placed
    several
    calls
    and
    e-mails
    with
    Bernd
    Kahn
    and
    the
    Center
    in
    an
    attmpt
    to
    locate
    the
    method,
    but no
    luck
    so
    far.
    Can you
    help on
    this
    one
    too?
    file://C
    :\Documents
    and Settings\McCambM\Local
    Settings\Temp\GW}
    00002.HTM
    11/26/2008

    Page
    2 of
    5
    Michael
    J.
    McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution
    Control
    Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Pat@epamail.epa.gov>
    7/10/2008
    7:43
    M >>>
    Mike,
    Here’s
    Waters
    6508 method that
    was
    approved
    for drinking
    water.
    Aren’ t
    you limited
    to methods
    that are listed
    as
    approved
    for drinking
    water?
    Based
    on the info
    at the
    top of the method,
    I’m guessing
    this
    may
    now be
    an ASTM method.
    It was
    evaluated under
    the ATP
    program, so
    EPA was
    given the
    method
    prior to the ASTM
    process.
    I don’t know
    this
    for
    sure
    and it
    will
    be
    something I investigate
    as
    we
    begin
    putting together
    our
    next Expedited
    Methods Approval
    FR
    action.
    (If
    it is the same
    method,
    we’ll
    probably list
    it in Appendix
    A.)
    (See
    attached
    file: Waters Method
    D
    6508, Rev
    2EPA-HQ-OW-2003-0070-0063
    .pdf)
    As for the
    other method,
    it was approved
    prior
    to the 2007
    methods
    rule.
    I don’t have a
    copy of it, because
    I wasn’t
    involved
    in the earlier
    methods
    rules. However,
    I
    have
    asked our ATP
    coordinator
    to see if
    it
    is in the ATP
    file. When I
    hear back from
    him, I’ll
    let you know.
    Hope this helps,
    Pat
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridge@±pc
    To
    b.
    state . ii . us>
    Pat Fair/CI/USEPA/US@EPA
    cc
    file://C:\Documents
    and Settings\McCambM\Local
    Settings\Temp\GW}00002.HTM
    11/26/2008

    Page3of5
    07/08/2008
    03:29
    PM
    Subj ect
    Re:
    Waters Methods
    Whatever
    you
    can
    do for
    me
    when you
    get
    back.
    I
    have
    continued
    to
    look
    into
    this
    today.
    I am
    convinced
    that Method
    6500
    added to
    SW-846
    in
    Update
    IV in
    the end
    of 2007
    is
    the
    method
    you
    have called
    T1
    Method
    D6508”
    from Waters.
    See 73
    Fed. Reg.
    486
    (Jan.
    3,
    2008)
    http://www.epa.gov/SW846/pdfs/6500.pdf.
    If
    this
    is true,
    I will
    likely
    cite
    the SW-846
    version
    of
    the
    method,
    since
    it
    is
    much
    easier
    to
    obtain
    than
    the
    method
    from
    Waters.
    As described,
    Waters
    initially
    acted
    like
    I
    spoke
    a
    foreign
    language
    when
    I asked
    for
    T
    ’Method
    D6508.’
    T
    As
    for
    Method
    B-lOll,
    it
    seems
    to
    distill
    down
    to me
    needing
    the title
    to
    the
    document
    in
    which
    the method
    appears.
    Talk to
    you when
    you
    return.
    Michael
    J.
    McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution
    Control
    Board
    312-814-6924
    >>>
    <Fair.Pat@epamail.epa.gov>
    7/8/2008
    2:18 PM
    >>>
    Mike,
    I’m
    working
    off
    site
    today,
    so I
    don’t
    have
    access
    to
    the
    references
    I
    file
    :1/C
    :\Documents
    and Settings\McCambM\Local
    Settings\Temp\GW}
    00002.HTM
    11/26/2008

    Page 4
    of
    5
    need
    to answer your
    questions.
    I should
    have
    copies
    of the methods
    that
    were
    added
    to
    40 CFR
    141
    as part
    of the 2007
    methods
    update rule.
    If
    these
    Waters
    methods
    are prior
    to that,
    I might not
    be able
    to help
    you.
    Unfortunately,
    I
    don’t
    know who
    might have
    them
    other
    than Waters.
    I’ll
    see what
    I can find
    tomorrow
    and
    get
    back to you.
    Pat
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridge@ipcb.state.il.us>
    wrote:
    To: Pat Fair/CI/USEPA/US@EPA
    From:
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridge@ipcb.state.il.us>
    Date:
    07/08/2008
    01:57PM
    Subject: Waters
    Methods
    I have tried
    to obtain
    copies of
    the two Waters
    methods
    referenced
    in 40
    C.F.R.
    141.23(k) (1)
    for fluoride
    and nitrite/nitrate
    using
    the
    contact
    information
    included in
    the
    rule.
    At first,
    the Waters rep
    could
    not
    locate
    anything based
    on the
    EPA descriptions
    included
    in the
    rule.
    This
    morning I
    received
    two documents
    that
    purport to
    be the
    methods.
    The documents
    raise questions
    that
    you
    might answer
    for me.
    The
    copy
    of
    Method B-lOll
    sent
    me
    by Waters
    is nearly identical
    to
    one
    that I found
    on the USEPA
    website.
    The only
    difference
    between
    the
    two
    is that the
    method
    from the
    USEPA wèbsite
    is
    headed
    T
    Waters.”
    The
    document
    it appears to
    include
    pages 13 through
    17 from some
    reference.
    It is undated,
    which
    means
    that
    I cannot
    use
    it for
    an
    incorporation
    by
    reference.
    Do you have
    a dated copy
    of Method
    B-lOll or
    a fuller
    copy -
    of
    the posted
    reference
    that would
    include
    the date?
    It
    appears
    that
    the method
    is just
    one
    cited out of
    a fuller
    reference, and
    I should
    cite to that
    fuller
    reference
    by its own
    title. I will
    also
    approach
    Waters with
    this
    request.
    Your
    rule cites
    “Waters Method
    D6508,
    Rev. 2,”
    entitled
    “Test
    Method
    file :1/C :\Documents
    and
    Settings\McCambM\Local
    Settings\Temp\GW}
    00002.HTM
    11/26/2008

    Page 5
    of
    5
    f or
    Determination
    of
    Dissolved
    Inorganic
    Anions
    in Aqueous
    Matrices
    Using
    Capillary
    Ion
    Electrophoresis
    and
    Chromate
    Electrolyte.”
    Waters
    sent
    me
    a document
    marked
    TMethod
    6500,”
    “revision
    0,”
    and
    dated
    February
    2007,
    and
    entitled
    “Dissolved
    Inorganic
    Anions
    In Aqueous
    Matrices
    By
    Capillary
    Ion
    Electrophoresis.”
    That
    document
    appears
    to be
    Method
    6500
    from
    SW-846.
    Is “Waters
    Method
    D6508,
    Rev.
    2” the
    same as
    Method
    6500,
    rev.
    0 from
    SW-846?
    If
    so, why
    did
    USEPA
    cite
    this as
    “D6508”?
    If
    not,
    can
    you
    forward
    me a copy
    of Method
    D6508
    or
    give me
    enough
    information
    to identify
    the
    method
    to Waters,
    that
    I might
    obtain
    a copy
    of
    the
    right
    method?
    Michael
    J.
    McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution
    Control
    Board
    312
    -814-6924
    fi1e://C:’Documents and Settings\McCambM\Local
    Settings\Temp\GW}00002.HTM
    11/26/2008

    From:
    Mike
    McCambridge
    To:
    Fair.PatepamaiI.epa.gov
    Date:
    7/11/2008
    3:45:30
    PM
    Subject:
    Re: Waters
    Methods
    It does, as the stream
    moves ever onward.
    Wasn’t
    it Aristotle who
    said that
    you cannot
    step into the same stream
    twice?
    Michael
    J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution Control
    Board
    312-814-6924
    >>>
    <Fair.Patepamail.ea.ov>
    7/10/2008
    9:31 PM
    >>>
    Mike,
    I haven’t
    done a one-to-one
    check of the ASTM
    method against the Waters
    method,
    so
    I
    can’t
    say for sure that they are
    the
    same.
    My comment
    was
    meant to let
    you
    know that
    I would do that BEFORE
    we
    issue the
    next set of method approvals.
    If they
    are the
    same or only
    have insignificant
    differences, then we
    will include the ASTM method
    as an
    approved method.
    Legally, it won’t
    be an
    approved
    drinking
    water
    method until we
    publish a notice in the Federal
    Register.
    It’s my opinion
    that
    if the Waters
    methods
    aren’t
    easily available from Waters,
    then
    you can easily
    justify not including them
    in your
    state
    regulations. Our ATP
    coordinator
    wasn’t
    able to find
    a copy of
    the
    nitrate/nitrite method
    in his files. However,
    he is still
    checking on it.
    I have the GA Tech method.
    I can email
    it to
    you on Monday.
    If you need it before then,
    you can go to the
    e-docket for the
    2007
    Methods
    Update Rule. I know the method
    is in the docket,
    because I
    put it there and it is available
    for download through
    the docket
    site.
    I will
    see if I can find out
    how we should
    be
    referencing
    the GA Tech method.
    I thought
    our information was correct when
    we
    went
    final on the rule.
    Hope this
    helps.
    Pat
    “Mike McCambridge”
    <mccambridgeäipcb.state.il.us>
    wrote:
    To: Pat
    Fair/Cl/USEPAIUS@EPA
    From: “Mike McCambridge”
    <mccambridoe(ircb.state.iI.us>
    Date: 07/10/2008 06:O7PM
    Subject:
    Re:
    Waters Methods
    Thank
    you.
    That nails it down.
    I
    will cite it as an
    ASTM method.
    I have
    another method problem. I have
    been trying to
    obtain
    a copy
    of that
    Ra-226/Ra-228
    method
    by
    gamma-ray spectometry
    developed by Georgia
    Insitute of Technology.
    The
    “Environmental
    Resources Center”
    has been disbanned or something,
    so
    that
    the number
    at 40 C.F.R. 141.74 is no longer
    valid. It may
    have become the Environmental
    Radiation Center
    or something.
    I have
    placed several calls and
    e-mails with Bernd Kahn and
    the
    Center in an
    attmpt to locate the method,
    but no luck so far.
    Can you help on this one
    too?
    Michael
    J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution
    Control
    Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Pateamail.epa.ov>
    7/10/2008 7:43
    AM >>>
    Mike,
    Here’s Waters 6508
    method
    that
    was approved
    for
    drinking water.
    Aren’t
    you
    limited to
    methods that are listed
    as approved for drinking
    water?
    Based on the info at the
    top
    of
    the method, I’m
    guessing this may now
    be
    an
    ASTM
    method.
    It was evaluated
    under
    the
    ATP program, so
    EPA was
    given
    the method prior to
    the
    ASTM process. I
    don’t know this for sure
    and it will be
    something
    I investigate
    as
    we
    begin putting together our
    next Expedited
    Methods
    Approval
    FR
    action. (If it
    is
    the
    same method,

    we’ll
    probably list it in Appendix A.)
    (See attached file: Waters Method
    D 6508, Rev
    2_EPA-HQ-OW-2003-0070-0063.pdf)
    As for the other method,
    it was approved prior
    to the 2007 methods rule.
    I don’t have
    a
    copy of it,
    because I wasn’t involved
    in
    the earlier
    methods
    rules. However, I have
    asked our ATP coordinator to
    see if it
    is in the
    ATP file. When I hear back from
    him, I’ll let you know.
    Hope this helps,
    Pat
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridgeipc
    To
    b.state.il.us>
    Pat
    Fair/Cl/USEPAIUS@EPA
    cc
    07/08/2008
    03:29
    PM
    Subject
    Re: Waters
    Methods
    Whatever you can do for me when
    you
    get
    back. I have continued to look
    into this today. I am convinced that Method
    6500 added
    to
    SW-846 in
    Update IV in the end of 2007 is the
    method you have called “Method
    D6508”
    from Waters. See 73 Fed. Reg. 486
    (Jan.
    3, 2008);
    http://www.epa.qov/SW-846/pdfs/6500.pdf.
    If this is true,
    I will likely
    cite the SW-846 version of the method,
    since it is much easier to obtain
    than the method from Waters. As described, Waters initially
    acted like
    I spoke
    a
    foreign
    language when
    I asked for “Method D6508.”
    As
    for
    Method B-i 011, it seems to distill down to me needing the
    title to the
    document in which the method
    appears.
    Talk to
    you
    when
    you
    return.
    Michael
    J.
    McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution Control Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Patepamail.epa.qov>
    7/8/2008 2:18 PM >>>
    Mike,
    I’m
    working off site today, so I don’t have
    access to
    the
    references I
    need to answer your
    questions.
    I should have copies of the
    methods
    that
    were
    added
    to 40 CFR 141
    as
    part of the
    2007 methods update
    rule. If
    these Waters methods are prior to that, I might not
    be able to help
    you.
    Unfortunately, I don’t know
    who
    might have them other than
    Waters.
    I’ll see
    what I can find tomorrow and get back to
    you.
    Pat
    “Mike McCambridge”
    <mccambridcietipcb.state.iI.us>
    wrote:
    To: Pat
    Fair/Cl/USEPA/US@EPA
    From: “Mike McCambridge”
    <mccambridgeticb.state.il.us>

    Date:
    07/08/2008 01:57PM
    Subject: Waters Methods
    have
    tried
    to obtain copies of the
    two Waters methods
    referenced
    in 40
    C.F.R.
    141 .23(k)(1)
    for
    fluoride and
    nitrite/nitrate
    using the contact
    information included
    in
    the
    rule. At
    first, the
    Waters
    rep could not
    locate anything based on the
    EPA descriptions
    included in the rule.
    This
    morning
    I received two
    documents
    that
    purport
    to be the methods.
    The documents
    raise questions
    that
    you
    might answer
    for
    me.
    The copy of Method B-lOll
    sent me by Waters
    is nearly identical
    to one
    that
    I found
    on the USEPA website.
    The only difference
    between the two
    is that
    the method
    from
    the USEPA website
    is headed “Waters.”
    The
    document it appears
    to include
    pages
    13 through
    17
    from some reference.
    It is
    undated, which means that
    I
    cannot use it
    for
    an
    incorporation
    by
    reference. Do
    you
    have
    a
    dated
    copy of
    Method
    B-I 011 or
    a
    fuller
    copy
    of the
    posted reference that would
    include the date?
    It appears that
    the method is just
    one cited out of a fuller
    reference, and I should
    cite
    to that fuller
    reference by its own title.
    I will also
    approach
    Waters
    with this request.
    Your rule cites
    “Waters Method
    D6508, Rev. 2,”
    entitled “Test Method for
    Determination
    of Dissolved
    Inorganic Anions
    in Aqueous Matrices
    Using
    Capillary Ion Electrophoresis
    and Chromate
    Electrolyte.”
    Waters sent me
    a document marked “Method
    6500,”
    “revision 0,”
    and dated February 2007,”
    and entitled “Dissolved
    Inorganic
    Anions
    In Aqueous
    Matrices
    By
    Capillary
    Ion Electrophoresis.” That
    document appears
    to be Method
    6500
    from SW-846. Is “Waters Method
    D6508, Rev.
    2” the same as Method
    6500,
    rev.
    0 from SW-846?
    If so, why did
    USEPA cite this as “D6508”?
    If not,
    can
    you
    forward
    me a copy
    of Method D6508
    or give me enough information
    to identify the method
    to Waters, that
    I might obtain
    a
    copy of
    the
    right
    method?
    Michael
    J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution
    Control
    Board
    312-814-6924

    From:
    Mike McCambridge
    To:
    Fair.PatepamaiI.epa.gov
    Date:
    8/6/2008
    2:08:48
    PM
    Subject:
    Georgia
    Radium Method
    I am
    having
    trouble
    locating
    the new
    method for
    Ra-226
    and
    Ra-228
    from the
    Georgia
    Institute
    of Technology
    that
    USEPA
    added on
    March 12, 2007.
    The
    Environmental
    Resource
    Center may
    no longer
    exist. I need
    a copy
    of the method
    if it is
    to
    appear
    in the Illinois
    regulations.
    I
    must also
    assure that the
    availability
    information
    is presented
    correctly.
    Can
    you provide
    a copy of
    the method?
    Can
    you provide where
    the public
    may
    obtain
    the
    method?
    Tomorrow
    the Board
    will propose
    the
    amendments
    that will
    include the
    March
    12, 2007 methods
    revisions
    and the June
    3,
    2008
    equivalent
    methods approvals.
    Issues
    will remain
    regarding
    Waters
    Method
    6508,
    rev. 2,
    which
    is
    the
    same
    as ASTM
    D6508-00(2005)e2,
    since I
    can get it
    from ASTM but
    not from
    Waters
    Corp., and
    the Georgia
    Radium
    Method
    that I now
    seek.
    Michael
    J.
    McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution
    Control
    Board
    312-814-6924

    Page 1
    of
    1
    Mike
    McCambridge
    - Re:
    Georgia
    Radium
    Method
    From:
    <Fair.Patepamai1.epa.gov>
    To:
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridgeipcb.state.il.us>
    Date:
    8/6/2008
    10:04PM
    Subject:
    Re:
    Georgia
    Radium
    Method
    Mike,
    I’m
    on
    travel
    this week,
    so
    I don’t
    have
    access
    to
    the
    GA Radium
    method.
    I’ll
    send
    it
    to
    you early
    next
    week.
    I
    seem
    to remember
    you
    saying
    that
    the
    contact
    information
    that was
    given
    to
    us
    for
    the
    March
    2007
    methods
    rule
    is no
    longer
    applicable.
    I’ll have
    to see
    if
    I can find
    the
    correct
    contact
    information
    for
    you.
    I know
    I can
    give
    you
    the
    method,
    but I’m
    sure
    you still
    need
    a
    source
    to
    publish
    in
    your
    regulations.
    Pat
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridge@ipcb.state.il.us>
    wrote:
    To:
    Pat
    Fair/CI/USEPA/US©EPA
    From:
    “Mike
    McCambridge”
    <mccambridge@ipcb.state.il.us>
    Date:
    08/06/2008
    12:08PM
    Subject:
    Georgia
    Radium
    Method
    I
    am
    having
    trouble
    locating
    the
    new
    method
    for
    Ra-226
    and
    Ra-228
    from
    the
    Georgia
    Institute
    of
    Technology
    that
    USEPA
    added
    on
    March
    12, 2007.
    The Environmental
    Resource
    Center
    may
    no longer
    exist.
    I need
    a copy
    of
    the
    method
    if
    it
    is
    to
    appear
    in the
    Illinois
    regulations.
    I must
    also
    assure
    that
    the availability
    information
    is
    presented
    correctly.
    Can
    you
    provide
    a
    copy
    of
    the
    method?
    Can
    you
    provide
    where
    the public
    may obtain
    the
    method?
    Tomorrow
    the
    Board
    will
    propose
    the
    amendments
    that
    will include
    the
    March
    12,
    2007
    methods
    revisions
    and
    the
    June
    3,
    2008
    equivalent
    methods
    approvals.
    Issues
    will
    remain
    regarding
    Waters
    Method
    6508,
    rev.
    2,
    which
    is the
    same
    as
    ASTM
    D6508-
    00(2005)e2,
    since
    I
    can get
    it
    from
    ASTM
    but
    not
    from
    Waters
    Corp.,
    and the
    Georgia
    Radium
    Method
    that
    I
    now
    seek.
    Michael
    J.
    McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution
    Control
    Board
    312-814-6924
    file://C:\Documents
    and
    Settings\McCambM\Local
    Settings\Temp\GW}00002.HTM
    11/26/2008

    From:
    Mike
    McCambridge
    To:
    Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov
    Date:
    9/11/2008
    4:29:42
    PM
    Subject:
    Radium
    Method
    I did
    not receive
    the
    e-mail.
    My IT
    people tell me
    that they
    have
    no way to recover
    items
    caught
    in their
    filters; they
    do not
    maintain
    a “spam
    folder,” as
    appears on both
    of
    my
    personal
    e-mail accounts.
    Try
    one more time,
    and use
    this
    address.
    Please
    CC
    my
    personal
    e-mail
    account:
    m.mccambridgeiatt.net.
    Also
    use
    your
    EPA
    address,
    and
    give
    the
    IT people
    here a couple
    of
    days
    to
    make the necessary
    system
    adjustments.
    I
    am
    sending
    a copy
    of
    this e-mail
    to
    our IT
    people, and
    I will
    ask them
    to
    include
    your
    domain
    as aIIowed.”
    It
    would
    amaze me
    if USEPA
    is blocked
    as
    a domain, but
    anything
    is
    possible.
    We live
    in such
    a nightmare
    world
    of
    spam
    and malicious
    e-mail. The best
    efforts
    of the most
    conscientous
    IT
    protocol is
    bound
    to
    “gang aft agley,”
    as
    Rabbie
    Burns would have
    it.
    If you
    have trouble,
    call me.
    Michael
    J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution
    Control
    Board
    312-814-6924

    From:
    Mike
    McCambridge
    To:
    Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov
    Date:
    9/15/2008
    12:02:52
    PM
    Subject:
    Geargia
    Tech
    Radium
    Method
    I did receive
    the
    method, but
    only
    on
    my personal
    e-mail account,
    not on the
    State system.
    We must bear
    this in mind
    for
    the future.
    If
    you
    need to contact
    me, use
    my personal e-mail
    (m.mccambrideatt.net)
    or
    call
    me.
    Thanks
    for your efforts.
    I have
    only one
    minor favor
    remianing
    to
    ask:
    could
    you
    let
    me know what
    you
    learn
    with
    regard to
    availability. I
    will
    redouble
    my efforts to
    get
    this
    information
    myself,
    and I will
    let
    you
    know
    if
    I
    learn
    enything,
    but
    I will need that
    information
    to
    complete
    the incorporation
    by reference.
    Perhaps,
    “U.S.
    EPA”
    will get
    a response
    before
    “Pollution Control
    Board.”
    So far,
    I
    have received
    no responses
    to calls or e-mails.
    Michael
    J.
    McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois
    Pollution Control
    Board
    312-814-6924

    From:
    Mike McCambridge
    To:
    Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov;
    TURLEY, Dawn
    Date:
    9/17/2008
    9:06:17
    AM
    Subject:
    Re: Test for
    IPCB E-mail delivery
    It
    worked, thank
    goodness.
    Thank
    you both
    (Pat Fair and Dawn
    Turley) for all your help.
    Michael
    J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution
    Control
    Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Pat@epamail.epa.gov>
    9/17/2008
    8:06 AM >>>
    I
    added Mike’s name to
    my email list.
    I believe
    the earlier messages
    that I sent to him
    were either replies
    to his messages
    or I
    copied/pasted
    his address from
    an earlier
    email.
    Hope you figure out
    the problem. You
    can see if he receives
    this message,
    since
    he’s copied
    on it.
    “Dawn
    TURLEY”
    <turleydicb.st
    ate.il.us>
    To
    Pat
    Fair/Cl/USEPAJUS@EPA
    09/16/2008 10:17
    cc
    AM
    Subject
    Re: Test for IPCB
    E-mail delivery
    Thank you
    for
    responding
    so
    quickly.
    I am trying to determine
    why Mike
    is
    not getting your
    e-mails. Would you please
    remove Mike McCambridges
    e-mail from
    your
    address book and recreate
    his address to
    ensure that
    it’s correct?
    His address is
    mccambmipcb.state.il.us
    Thank
    you,
    Dawn Turley
    IPCB
    Network Support
    Phone: 217-782-2415
    Fax: 217-524-8508
    On 9/15/2008
    at 7:25 PM, <Fair.Pat(5epamail.epa.qov>
    wrote:
    Dawn,
    I received your email.
    Pat Fair
    “Dawn TURLEY”
    <turleyd(ircb.state.il.us>
    wrote:
    To:
    Pat
    Fair/Cl/USEPAIUS@EPA
    From: “Dawn
    TURLEY”
    <turleydipcb.state.iI.us>
    Date:
    09/15/2008 02:27PM

    Subject:
    Test
    for IPCB E-mail
    delivery
    I
    am the e-mail
    administrator
    for the IPCB.
    Mike McCambridge
    is
    having
    problems receiving
    your e-mails.
    In order
    to track
    and
    resolve
    the
    problem,
    would
    you
    please
    reply to
    this e-mail
    and then
    try to
    send me
    a
    new
    e-mail?
    Thank
    you,
    Dawn
    Turley
    IPCB
    Network
    Support
    Phone: 217-782-2415
    Fax: 217-524-8508

    From:
    <Fair.Pat©epamail
    .epa.gov>
    To:
    MCCAMBM©ipcb.state.il.us
    Date:
    10/15/2008
    10:30:16AM
    Subject:
    Source
    of Radium
    226-228
    method
    Mike,
    I finally
    tracked
    down
    the contact
    information
    for
    obtaining
    the GA Tech
    method
    for radium
    226 &
    228 in drinking
    water.
    Here it is:
    Robert
    Rosson
    Georgia Tech
    Research
    Institute
    925
    Dalney
    Road
    Atlanta, GA
    30332
    (404)407-6339
    robert.rossongtri.gatech
    .edu
    I
    can’t
    easily
    update
    the
    CFR
    to reflect
    this
    changed
    contact
    information.
    I am going
    to
    try to
    update
    the information
    on
    EPA’s
    drinking
    water web
    page,
    so it will
    be accurate.
    I hope this
    information
    helps
    and
    is
    not too late.
    Pat Fair

    From:
    Mike McCambridge
    To:
    Fair.Pat©epamail.epa.gov
    Date:
    10/15/2008 10:32:50AM
    Subject:
    Re:
    Source of
    Radium 226-228
    method
    Thank
    you
    very much. I now have
    all I need
    to
    include
    the method
    in the
    pending update, so that entities
    in
    Illinois may
    opt
    to
    use the method.
    Michael
    J. McCambridge
    Attorney
    Illinois Pollution Control Board
    312-814-6924
    >>> <Fair.Patepamail.epa.gov>
    10/15/2008
    10:29
    AM
    >>>
    Mike,
    I finally tracked down the
    contact information
    for obtaining the GA Tech
    method for
    radium
    226
    & 228 in drinking
    water. Here it is:
    Robert Rosson
    Georgia
    Tech Research Institute
    925 Dalney Road
    Atlanta,
    GA
    30332
    (404)407-6339
    robert.rossonctri.qatech.edu
    I can’t
    easily update the CFR to reflect
    this changed contact
    information. I
    am
    going to try
    to
    update the information
    on EPA’s
    drinking water
    web page, so it will
    be
    accurate.
    I
    hope this information
    helps and is
    not too late.
    Pat Fair

    United States
    EnvironmGntal Protection
    Agency
    Office of Research
    and
    Development
    Washington
    DC 20460
    EPAI600JR-94/1 73
    October 1994
    •6EPA
    /
    Technical
    Notes
    C)fl
    Drinking
    Water
    Methods
    7Z
    -A16
    -
    /4/
    AC
    9

    S

    EPAJ600)R-941173
    October
    1994
    TECHNICAL
    NOTES
    on.
    DRINKING
    WATER
    METEIODS
    U.
    S. Environmental
    Protection
    Agency
    Office
    of Water
    Office
    of Ground
    Water
    and
    Drinking
    Water
    Office
    of
    Research
    and
    Development
    Environmental
    Monitoring
    Systems Laboratory
    Cincinnati,
    01145268
    Printed
    On
    Recycled
    Paper

    DISCLAIMER
    This
    manual has
    been
    reviewed
    by
    the
    Technical
    Support
    Division,
    Office
    of
    Water
    and the
    Environmental
    Monitoring
    Systems
    Laboratory
    Cincinnati,
    U.S.
    Environmental
    Protection
    Agency,
    and
    approved
    for
    publication.
    Mention
    of
    trade
    names or
    commercial
    products
    does
    not
    constitute
    endorsement
    or
    recommendation
    for
    use.
    ii
    0

    FOREWORD
    ‘Compliance
    with
    National
    Primary
    and
    Secondary
    Drinking
    Water
    Regulations
    requires
    that
    analyses
    of
    samples.
    be
    conducted
    by
    a
    certifiedlaboratory.
    A
    certification
    condition
    is
    that
    an
    approved
    method
    be
    used.
    The
    Office
    of
    Water’s
    (OW)
    Technical
    Support
    Division
    (TSD)
    prepares
    the
    analytical
    methods
    parts
    of
    drinking
    water
    regulations.
    The
    Office
    of
    Research
    and
    Development’s
    (ORD) Environmental
    Monitoring
    Systems
    Laboratory
    at
    Cincinnati,
    Ohio
    (EMSL—
    Cincinnati)
    conducts
    research
    to
    develop
    and
    evaluate
    analytical
    methods
    for
    the
    determination,
    of
    contaminants
    in
    many
    media
    including
    drinking
    water.
    EMSL—Cincinnati
    also
    regularly
    publishes
    methods
    for
    use
    in
    drinking
    water
    compliance
    monitoring.
    This joint
    OW/ORD
    publication,
    Technical
    Notes
    on
    Dr:inking
    Water
    Methods,
    was
    prepared
    to
    add
    modifications,
    clarifications,
    options
    or
    improvements
    to
    methods
    that have been
    previously
    approved
    and
    published.
    To
    allow
    the
    public
    to
    use
    these
    changes
    without
    waiting
    for
    incorporation
    in
    the
    next
    revision
    of
    a
    method,
    EPA
    has elected
    to
    describe
    the
    changes
    in
    this
    document.
    The
    Office of
    Water will approve
    these
    changes
    in
    a
    1994
    rulemaking
    by
    incorporating
    Technical
    Notes
    on
    Drinking
    Water
    Methods
    into
    the
    drinking
    water regulations.
    Procedures
    described
    herein
    supersede
    or
    complement
    procedures
    described
    in
    the
    approved
    methods.
    When
    a
    method
    is
    revised,
    relevant
    procedures
    from
    this
    document
    will
    be
    included
    in
    the
    revised
    method.
    We
    are
    pleased
    to
    provide
    these
    technical
    notes
    and
    believe
    they
    will
    be
    of
    considerable
    value to
    public
    and
    private
    laboratory,
    rgulatory
    and
    certification
    personnel.
    Alan
    A.
    Stevens,
    Director
    Thomas
    Clark,
    Director
    Technical Support
    Division
    Environmental
    Monitoring
    Systems
    Office
    of
    Water
    Laboratory
    Cincinnati
    111

    Table
    of
    Contents
    TITLE
    PAGE
    Disclaimer
    .11
    Foreword
    Acknowledgments
    Introduction
    vii
    I.
    Approved Drinking Water Methods for Compliance Monitoring
    I
    II.
    Methods
    To Be Withdrawn
    on July 1, 1996
    14
    III.
    Recommended
    Methods for
    Secondary Drinking Water Contaminants
    20
    IV.
    Mandatory Method Modifications
    22
    Standard Method 4500—Cl—E
    (Chlorine Residuals)
    23
    Standard Method 4500—Cl—G
    (Chlorine Residuals)
    24
    Protocol
    for Continuous Chlorine
    Residual Monitoring
    25
    Spectrophotometric Determinations of Cyanide
    26
    Turbidimeter Calibration
    28
    Sample Digestion for Determination of
    Metal Contaminants
    29
    Standard Method 3114B (Arsenic and Selenium)
    30
    Standard Method 3113B
    and ASTM D3859—93B
    (Selenium)
    31
    Standard Method 3113B
    (Chromium)
    32
    EPA
    Methods502.2
    and 524.2, Sorbent
    Traps
    33
    EPA
    Methods 502.2, 524.2
    and 551, Sample Acidification
    34
    EPA
    Method 506, Errata
    in Summary
    35
    EPA
    Method 508,
    DCPA and
    Hexachiorocyclopentadiene
    36
    EPA
    Methods 515.1 and 515.2, Use
    of
    TMSD
    37
    iv
    0

    Table of Contents
    TITLE
    PAGE
    IV. Mandatory
    Method Modifications (Continued)
    EPA
    Method 524.2,
    Quality
    Assurance, VOC Data
    40
    EPA Method
    531.1 and SM 6610,
    Storage of Samples
    44
    EPA
    Method
    551,
    Pentane
    45
    EPA
    Method549.1, Sample
    Containers
    .46
    Alternative Liquid—Solid Extraction Cartridges and
    Disks......47
    V.
    Recommended Method Modifications
    48
    EPA
    Method 100.1, Asbestos
    Guidance
    49
    EPA Method 502.2, Use of thePID
    52
    EPA Methods 502.2, 524.2
    and
    551, Sample
    Dechlorination
    EPA
    Method 504.1, hromatographic Interferences
    .54
    EPA
    Methods
    505, 507, 508,
    InterChange of Detectors
    56
    EPA
    Methods 507, 508 and 515.1,
    Mercuric Chloride...
    ..
    57
    EPA Method
    1613, Dioxin
    Guidance
    58
    VI.
    EPA
    Contacts
    and Method References
    59
    V

    (U
    ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
    We
    appreciate
    the many
    constructive
    comments
    and
    informative
    questions.
    from
    our
    customers,
    the
    analytical
    and
    certification
    laboratory
    community.
    Their
    information provided
    the
    basis
    for
    the
    options,
    clarifications
    and
    method
    modifications
    that
    are
    approved
    and
    described
    in
    these
    technical
    notes.
    Many
    people
    in
    the
    Office
    of Research
    and
    Development’s
    Environmental
    Monitoring Systems
    Laboratory
    — Cincinnati
    (EMSL—Cincinnati)
    and
    in
    the
    Office
    of
    Ground
    Water
    and
    Drinking
    Water’s
    Technical
    Support
    Division
    (TSD)
    in
    Cincinnati
    contributed
    to these
    notes.
    The
    EPA
    scientists
    in
    these
    groups
    used
    information from
    their
    many
    contacts
    with
    the
    public,
    and
    their
    years
    of
    experience
    with
    drinking
    water
    analysis
    to
    produce
    this
    publication.
    Technical Notes
    was
    developed
    and edited
    by
    Richard
    Reding
    of
    TSO
    who.
    wishes
    to
    especially
    acknowledge
    the
    contributions
    of
    Thomas
    Behymer,
    James
    Eichelberger,
    Theodore
    Martin,
    Jean
    Munch,
    James
    O’Dell,
    John
    Pfaff,
    Jody
    Shoemaker
    and
    Nancy
    lilmer
    from
    EMSL—Cincinnati,
    Patricia
    Snyder
    Fair,
    Marianne
    Feige, Edward
    Glick,
    David
    Munch
    and
    Kent
    Sorrell
    from
    TSD,
    and
    Patrick
    Clark
    from
    the
    Risk
    Reduction
    Engineering
    Laboratory
    in
    Cincinnati.
    Carol
    Madding,
    TSD,
    contributed
    technical
    notes
    and
    helped
    with
    the
    editorial
    design.
    In
    addition,
    the
    names
    of
    the
    developers
    of
    the
    methods
    and
    instrumentation
    that
    are
    the
    subject
    of
    this
    publication
    can
    be
    found
    in
    the
    acknowledgment
    and
    reference sections
    of
    the
    EPA
    method
    or
    EPA
    methods
    manual.
    The
    administrative
    personnel
    of
    EMSL—Cincinnati,
    in
    particular
    Diane
    Schirmann, Patricia
    I-Iurr,
    and
    Helen
    Brock,
    provided
    outstanding
    support
    to
    this
    effort.
    The
    editor
    also
    thanks
    the
    administrators
    and
    managers
    of
    the
    Environmental Protection
    Agency
    who
    supported
    the
    development
    and
    preparation
    of
    this
    document.
    Special
    appreciation
    is
    due
    to
    Herbert
    J. Brass,
    Chief
    of
    the
    Drinking Water
    Quality
    Assessment
    Branch,
    TSD,
    and
    William
    L. Budde,
    Director
    of
    the
    Chemistry
    Research
    Division,
    EMSL—Cincinnati,
    for
    their
    cooperation and
    support during
    this
    project.
    vi
    0

    INTRODUCTION
    Richard
    Reding
    This document,
    Technical
    Notes
    on
    DrinkingWater
    Methods,
    describes
    method
    modifications
    that
    were
    developed
    after
    an
    approved
    method
    had
    been
    published.
    Most
    of
    the
    modifications
    were
    formerly
    footnoted
    in
    the
    drinking
    water
    regulations,
    or
    were
    described
    in
    a proposed
    rule
    (58
    fj3,
    65622,
    December
    15,
    1993). Because
    this
    document
    is
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    drinking
    water
    regulations,
    it
    is
    a
    mandatory
    part
    of
    the
    analytical
    procedures
    required
    to
    conduct
    complian.àe
    monitoring
    and
    to
    obtain
    laboratory
    certification.
    Laboratories
    can
    use.
    this
    publication
    as
    a
    guide
    to
    analytical
    methods
    approved
    under
    the
    Safe
    Drinking
    Water
    Act
    (SDWA),.to
    obtain
    information
    on
    the
    latest
    approved
    modifications.to
    these
    methods,
    and
    to
    contact
    EPA
    with
    questions
    about
    drinking
    water
    methods.
    Since
    EPA
    method
    manuals
    are
    printed
    in
    a
    looseleaf
    format,
    the
    format
    of
    Technical
    Notes
    allows
    readers
    to
    insert..
    pages containing
    a
    method
    change
    in
    the
    manual
    containing
    the
    áffected•EPA
    analytical
    method.
    Methods
    approved,
    for
    monitorin.g
    unde.r
    National
    Primary
    Drinking
    Water.
    Regulations
    are
    in
    Section
    I
    of
    this
    document...
    Methods
    for
    which
    ‘approval
    will
    be
    withdrawn
    in
    1996
    are
    in
    Section
    II,
    and
    methods
    for
    monitoring
    under
    .
    National
    Secondary
    Drinking
    Water
    Regulations
    are
    contained.in
    Section
    III.
    Mandatory
    method
    modifications
    are
    described
    in
    Section
    IV.
    The
    modifications
    include
    a
    protocol
    for
    monitoring
    chlorine
    residuals
    continuously
    as
    required
    under the
    Surface
    Water
    Treatment
    Rule,
    requirements
    for
    mandatory
    nranual
    distillation
    of
    samples
    collected
    for
    determination
    of
    cyanide,
    and
    use
    of
    another derivatizing
    reagent
    with
    EPA
    Methods
    515.1
    and
    515.?.
    Technical
    notes
    on
    optional
    procedures
    and
    recommended
    modifications
    to
    compliance
    methods
    are
    described
    in
    Section
    V.
    . These notes
    include
    guidance
    on
    how
    to
    make
    analyses
    of
    asbestos-
    and
    dioxin
    more
    cost—effective,,
    and
    when
    to
    omit
    use
    of
    mercuric
    chloride
    in
    some
    EPA
    pesticide
    methods.,
    The
    remainder
    of
    this
    introduction
    provides
    guidance
    on
    methods
    selection
    and
    on
    the
    laboratory
    certification
    aspects
    of
    approved
    methods.
    SELECTION
    OF
    METHODS FOR
    OTHER
    CHEMICALS
    EPA
    believes
    that
    some
    water
    systems
    wish
    to
    measure
    ‘bhemicals
    that
    are
    not
    included
    in
    drinking
    water
    regulations,
    and
    need
    advice
    on
    what
    method
    to
    use.
    The
    December
    1993
    Proposal
    noted
    that
    while
    EPA
    only approves
    methods
    for
    contaminants
    regulated
    under
    the
    SDWA,
    the
    Agency
    encourages
    laboratories
    to’
    use
    these methods
    for
    voluntary
    monitoring
    of
    other
    contaminants,
    “if
    the
    method
    description
    specifically
    includes
    these.
    contaminants.”
    This
    recommendation
    does
    not
    preclude
    use
    of
    other
    methods,
    including
    test
    kits,
    for
    voluntary
    monitoring.
    Analysts
    always should
    carefully
    evaluate
    the
    performance
    of
    any
    method
    when
    using
    it
    for
    samples
    other
    than
    compliance
    monitoring
    samples,
    or
    for
    contaminants
    not
    regulated
    under
    the
    SDWA.
    vii

    LABORATORY
    CERTIFICATION
    When
    using an approved
    method
    to obtain certification
    or tà
    conduct
    compliance
    monitoring,
    EPA strongly encourages
    users
    of methods that
    are
    published
    in an EPA manual
    to follow
    instructions contained
    in the
    introductions to
    these manuals,
    unless
    the
    instructions
    conflict
    with
    statements
    in
    this document,
    or
    in
    the
    drinking water
    regulations.
    Although
    must”
    can be
    argued to
    be
    a
    stronger word
    than “should”
    in
    requiring
    adherence
    to
    method
    procedures,
    some
    approved
    methods
    use
    these
    terms
    interchangeably.
    Analytical methods
    for drinking
    water
    are written to
    be
    prescriptive
    enough
    to provide
    uniformity of data
    quality,
    and flexible
    enough
    to allow analysts
    to
    exercise judgment,
    skill
    and
    initiative
    to
    improve
    the
    overall quality
    and efficiency
    of compliance
    monitoring.
    The Agency
    does not
    believe
    that
    semantical
    differences between
    “must” or
    “should”
    limits the
    authority
    of certification
    officials to
    enforce provisions
    of
    the
    methods.
    viii
    0

    SECTION
    I.
    APPROVED
    DRINKING
    WATER
    METHODS
    FOR
    COMPLIANCE
    MONITORING
    To
    make
    this
    document
    a
    more
    complete
    source
    of
    current
    methods
    information,
    the
    approved
    methods
    which
    are
    specified
    in
    regulations
    at
    40
    CFR
    Part
    141,
    are
    listed
    in
    this
    section.
    Methods
    for
    which
    approval
    will
    be
    withdrawn
    in
    1996
    are
    in
    Section
    II.
    Recommended
    methods
    for
    secondary
    contaminant
    monitoring,
    which
    are
    specified
    in
    regulations
    at
    40
    CFR
    Part
    143,
    are
    listed
    in
    Section
    III.
    1

    METHODS FOR COLIFORM
    SAMPLING
    To
    comply with the provisions of the Total Coliform Rule, public water
    systems
    must conduct analyses in
    accordance
    with
    one of the analytical
    methods
    in the following table.
    Total coliform methods, except
    for
    the Colisure Test,
    are contained in
    the
    18th
    edition of Standard Methods for the Examination
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,
    1992, American Public health Association, 1015
    Fifteenth
    Street
    NW,
    Washington,
    D.C.
    20005. Preparation of the
    EC medium
    and the
    nutrient agar are
    described
    in
    Standard Methods,
    p.
    9—52,
    para. la, and
    pp.
    9—
    47
    to 9—48, respectively. A description of the Colisure Test maybe obtained
    from the Millipore Corporation,
    Technical
    Services Department, 80 Ashby Road,
    Bedford, MA
    01730. The phone number is (800) 645—5476.
    Organism
    Methodology
    Citation
    Total
    Coliforins
    1
    Total Coliform Fermentation
    9221A,
    B
    Techni
    que
    2’
    3’
    4
    Total Coliform Membrane
    Filter
    9222A,
    B, C
    Technique
    Presence—Absence
    (P—A)
    Coliform
    9221D
    Test
    4’5
    ONPG—F4UG Test
    6
    9223
    Colisure
    Test
    7
    Footnotes
    The time
    from sample collection to initiation
    of analysis may not exceed
    30
    hours.
    2
    Lactose
    broth, as commercially available, may
    be
    used in lieu of
    lauryl
    tryptose broth, if the
    system conducts
    at least 25 parallel tests between
    this
    medium
    and lauryl
    tryptose broth using
    the
    water normally tested, and
    this
    comparison demonstrates
    that the false—positive
    rate
    for total coliforms,
    using
    lactose
    broth, is
    less
    than
    10 percent.
    If
    inverted
    tubes are used
    to
    detect gas production,
    the media should cover
    these tubes at
    least
    one—half
    to two—thirds
    after the sample is added.
    No requirement
    exists
    to run
    the completed
    phase On 10 percent of all
    •total
    col
    iform—positive confirmed
    tubes.
    Six—times
    formulation strength
    may
    be used if the
    medium is filter—
    sterilized
    rather than autoclaved.
    .
    6
    The
    ONPG—MUG Test is also known as the Autoanalysis
    Colilert System.
    The
    Colisure
    Test
    must be incubated for 28 hours before
    examining the
    results.
    If examination at
    28
    hours is not
    convenient, then results
    may be
    examined
    at any.
    time
    between 28 hours and 48 hours.
    2

    .
    .
    .
    METHODS
    FOR
    INORGANIC
    CHEMICALS
    AND
    OTHER
    PARAMETERS
    Analysis
    for
    the
    following
    contaminants
    shall
    be
    conducted
    in
    accordance
    with
    the
    methods
    in
    the
    following
    Table,
    or
    their
    equivalent
    as
    determined
    by
    EPA.
    The
    monitoring
    requirements
    for
    these
    contaminants
    are
    specified
    at
    §
    141.23,
    141.41,
    and
    141.80
    141.91.
    Criteria
    for
    analyzing
    arsenic,
    barium,
    beryllium,
    cadmium,
    calcium,
    chromium,
    copper,
    lead,
    nickel,
    selenium
    and
    thallium
    with
    digestion
    or
    directly
    without
    digestion,
    and
    other
    mandatory
    procedures
    are
    contained
    in
    Section
    IV
    of
    this
    Technical
    Notes
    document.
    Guidance
    on
    conducting
    asbestos
    analysis
    is
    described
    in
    Section
    V
    of
    Technical
    Notes.
    Contaminant
    Methodology
    EPA
    ASTM
    Other
    Antimony
    ICP-Mass
    Spectrometry
    2OO.8
    Hydride—Atomic
    Absorption
    D—3697—92
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Platform
    2OO.9
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    3113B
    Arsenic
    Inductively
    Coupled
    Plasma
    2OO.7
    3120B
    ICP—Mass
    Spectrometry
    2OO.8
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Platform
    2OO.9
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    D—2972—93C
    31138
    Hydride
    Atomic
    Absorption
    D—2972—93B
    3114B
    Asbestos
    Transmission
    Electron
    Microscopy
    ioO.i
    Transmission
    Electron
    Microscopy
    lOO.2
    Barium
    Inductively
    Coupled
    Plasma
    2OO.7
    3120B
    ICP—Mass
    Spectrometry
    2OO.8
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Direct
    3111D
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    3113B
    Beryllium
    InductivelyCoupled
    P1asma_
    -
    312OB
    ICP-MassSpectrometry
    2O0.8
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Platform
    2OO.9
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    D—3645—93B
    31138

    Contaminant
    Methodology
    EPA
    Other
    Cadmium
    Inductively
    Coupled
    Plasma
    2OO.7
    ICP—Mass
    Spectrometry
    2OO.8
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Platform
    2OO.9
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    3l13B
    Chromium
    Inductively
    CoupledPlasma
    2OO.7
    3120B
    ICP—Mass
    Spectrometry
    2OO.8
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Platform
    2OO.9
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    3113B
    Cyanide
    Manual
    Distillation
    followed
    by
    4500-’CN—C
    Spectrophotometric,
    Amenable
    D2036-9lB
    4500—CN--G
    Spectrophotometric
    Manual
    D2036—9lA
    4500—CN—E
    I_3300_856
    Semi—automated
    33547
    Selective
    Electrode
    4500CN-F
    Fluoride
    Ion
    Chromatography
    3OO.O
    D4327-9l
    41105
    Manual
    Distill.;
    Color.
    SPADNS
    4500F—B,D
    Manual
    Electrode
    D1179—93B
    4500F—C
    Automated
    Electrode
    380-75WE
    8
    Automated
    Alizarin
    4500F—E
    129-71W
    8
    Mercury
    Manual,
    Cold
    Vapor
    24S.l
    03223—91
    3ll2B
    Automated,
    Cold
    Vapor
    245.2
    ICP—Mass
    Spectrometry
    200.8
    Nickel
    Inductively
    Coupled
    Plasma
    2O0.7
    31205
    ICP—Mass
    Spectrometry
    20O.8
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Platform
    2O0.9
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Direct
    3lllB
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    3l13B
    Nitrate
    Ion
    Chromatography
    3OO.0
    D4327—9l
    41105
    B-lOll’
    0
    Automated
    Cadmium
    Reduction
    353.2
    D3867—90A
    4500—N0
    3
    —F
    Ion
    Selective
    Electrode
    4500—N0
    3
    —D
    601”
    Manual
    Cadmium
    Reduction
    D3867—90B
    4500—N0
    3
    —E
    Q

    ..
    0
    Contaminant
    Methodology
    EPA
    ASTM’
    SM
    2
    Other
    -
    Nitrite
    Ion
    Chromatography
    3OO.O
    D4327—91.
    4110B
    B-lOll’
    0
    Automated
    Cadmium
    Reduction
    353.2
    03867—90A
    4500—N0
    3
    —F
    Manual
    Cadmium
    Reduction
    D386790B
    4500—N0
    3
    E
    Spectrophotometric
    4500—NO
    2
    —B
    Selenium
    Hydride—Atomic
    Absorption
    D3859—93A
    31148
    ICP—Mass
    Spectrometry
    2OO.8
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Platform
    2OO.9
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    .
    03859—93B
    3113B
    Thallium
    ICP—Mass
    Spectrometry
    2OO.8
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Platform
    2OO.9
    Lead
    Atomic
    absorption;
    furnace
    D3559—90D
    3113B
    ICP—Mass
    spectrometry
    2OO.8
    Atomic
    absorption;
    platform
    2OQ.9
    Copper
    Atomic
    absorption;
    furnace
    D1688—90C
    3113B
    Atomic
    absorption;
    direct
    aspiration
    D1688—90A
    3111B
    ICP
    2OO.7
    3120B
    ICP
    Mass
    spectrometry
    2OO.8
    Atomic.
    absorption;
    platform
    2OO.9
    pH
    Electrometric
    l5O.l
    D1293—84
    45OO—H—B
    15O.2
    -
    Conductivity
    Conductance
    01125—91A
    25108
    Calcium
    EDTA
    titrimetric
    D511—93A
    3500—Ca—D
    Atomic.
    absorption;
    direct
    aspiration
    D5l1—93B
    3111B
    Inductively—coupled
    plasma
    2OO.7
    3120B
    AIkällxuity
    Titrirnetric
    .
    D1067—92B
    2320B
    Electrometric
    titration
    I1O3O85

    Contaminant
    Methodology
    EPA
    ASTM
    1
    SM
    2
    Other
    Ortho—
    Colorimetric,
    automated,
    ascorbic
    acid
    365.11
    4500—P—F
    phosphate
    unfiltered,
    Colorimetric,
    ascorbic
    acid,
    single
    D515—88A
    4500—P—E
    no
    digestion
    reagent
    or
    hydrolysis
    Colorimetric,
    phosphomolybdate;
    I_1601_856
    automated-segmented
    flow;
    I_2601_906
    automated
    discrete
    I_2598_856
    Ion
    Chromatography
    300.0
    D4327—91
    4110
    Silica
    Colorimetric,
    molybdate
    blue;
    I_1700_856
    automated—segmented
    flow
    L_2700_856
    Colorimetric
    D859—88
    Molybdosilicate
    4500—Si—D
    Heteropoly
    blue
    4500—Si-E
    Automated
    method
    for
    molybdáte—reactive
    silica
    4500—Si—F
    Inductively—coupled
    plasma
    200.7
    3120B
    Temperature
    Thermometric
    -
    2550B
    Sodium
    Inductively—coupled
    plasma
    200.7,
    Atomic
    absorption;
    direct
    aspiration
    3111B
    e

    Footnotes
    Annual
    Book
    of
    ASTM
    Standards,
    Vols.
    11.01
    and
    11.02,
    American
    Society
    for
    Testing
    and
    Materials,
    1916
    Race
    Street,
    Philadelphia,
    PA
    19103.
    18th
    edition
    of
    Standard
    Methods
    for
    the
    Examination
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,
    1992,
    American
    Public
    Health
    Association,
    1015
    Fifteenth
    Street
    NW,
    Washington,
    D.C.
    20005.
    “Methods
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Metals
    in
    Environmental
    Samples
    Supplement
    I”,
    EPA—600/R—94/111,
    May
    1994.
    Availalble
    at
    NTIS,
    PB94—
    184942.
    Method
    100.1,
    “Analytical
    Method
    For
    Determination
    of
    Asbestos
    Fibers
    in
    Water,”
    EPA—600/4—83—043,
    September
    1983
    Available
    at
    NTIS,
    PB83—
    260471.
    I
    Method
    100.2,
    “Determination
    Of
    Asbestos
    Structures
    Over
    10
    j.Lm
    in
    Length
    in
    Drinking
    Water,”
    EPA/600/R—94/134,
    June
    1994.
    Available
    at
    NTIS,
    PB94—201902.
    S
    Available
    from
    BOktdOWZFiIë
    Róftéctioñ
    U.S.
    Geological
    Survey,
    Federal
    Center,
    Box.
    25425,
    Denver,
    CO
    80225-0425.
    “Methods
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Inorganic
    Substances
    in
    Environmental
    Samples,”
    EPA—600/R—93/100,
    August
    1993.
    Available
    at
    NTIS,
    PB94-
    121811.
    8
    Industrial
    Method
    No.
    129—71W,
    “Fluoride
    in
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,”
    December
    1972,
    and
    Method
    No.
    380—75WE,
    “Fluoride
    in
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,”
    February
    1976,
    Technicon
    Industrial
    Systems,
    Tarrytown,
    NY
    10591.
    Methods
    150.1,
    150.2
    and
    245.2
    are
    available
    from
    USEPA,
    EMSL—
    Cincinnati,
    OH
    45268.
    The
    identical
    methods
    are
    also
    in
    “Methods
    for
    Chemical
    Analysis
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastes,”
    EPA—600/4—79/020,
    March
    1983.
    ,
    Method
    B—lOll,
    “Waters
    Test
    Method
    for
    Determination
    of
    Nitrite/Nitrate
    in
    Water
    Using
    Single
    Column
    Ion
    Chromatography,”
    Millipore
    Corporation,
    Waters
    Chromatography
    Division,
    34
    Maple
    Street,
    Milford,
    MA
    01757.
    11
    Technical
    Bulletin
    601
    “Standard
    Method
    of
    Test
    for
    Nitrate
    in
    Drinking
    Water,”
    July
    1994,
    PN
    221890—001,
    ATI
    Orion,
    529
    Main
    Street,
    Boston,
    MA
    02129.
    This
    method
    is
    identical
    to
    Orion
    WeWWG/5880,
    which
    is
    approved
    for
    nitrate
    analysis.
    ATI
    Orion
    republished
    the
    method
    in
    1994,
    and
    renumbered
    it
    as
    601,
    because
    the
    1985
    manual
    “Orion
    Guide
    to
    Water
    and
    Wastewater
    Analysis,”
    which
    contained
    WeWWG/5880,
    is
    no
    longer
    available.
    7

    METHODS FOR ORGANIC CHEMICALS
    Analyses for regulated organic
    contaminants under the
    monitoring
    requirements
    specified
    at
    §141.24
    and 141.30
    shall be conducted using
    the
    following
    EPA
    methods
    or their
    equivalent as approved by
    EPA. Other
    mandatory
    and optional procedures for
    conducting
    these methods
    are described
    in Sections
    IV and V, respectively,
    of
    this
    document.
    Contaminant
    Method
    524.2
    524.2,
    524.2
    524.2
    524.2
    524.2
    524.2
    524.2
    524.2
    524.2
    524.2
    524.2
    524.2, 551
    524.2, 551
    524.2, 551
    524.2
    524.2
    524.2
    524.2
    524.2
    524.2
    551
    Benzene
    Carbon
    tetrachi oride
    CM
    orobenzene
    1,
    2—Di chi
    orobenzene
    1,4—Dichlorobenzene
    1,2—Dichioroethane
    ci s—Di chi
    oroethyl
    ene
    trans—Di chi oroethyl ene
    Dichi
    oromethane
    1,2—Dichloropropane
    Ethyl benzene
    Styren e
    Tetrachi oroethyl
    ene
    1,1, 1—Tn
    chi
    oroethane
    Tn
    chi oroethyl
    ene
    Tol uene
    1,2, 4—Tn chi
    orobenzene
    1, 1—Di
    chi oroethyl
    ene
    1, 1,
    2—Tn chi oroethane
    Vinyl
    chloride
    Xylenes (total)
    2,3,7,8—TCDD
    (dioxin)
    2,4—D
    2,4,5—TP
    (Silvex)
    Alachior
    Atrazine
    Benzo(a)pyrene
    Canbofuran
    Chlordane
    Dalapon
    Di
    (2—ethyl hexyl
    )
    adi pate
    Di (2—ethyl
    hexyl
    )
    phthal ate
    Di brornochi
    oropropane (DBCP)
    Dinoseb
    Diquat
    Endothall
    Endri
    n
    Ethylene
    dibromide (EDB)
    Gi
    yphosate
    Heptachlor
    Heptachior
    Epoxide
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    .502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    502.2,
    1613
    515.2, 555, 515.1
    515.2, 555, 515.1
    5051,
    507, 525.2, 508.1
    5051,
    507,
    525.2, 508.1
    525.2, 550,
    550.1
    531.1, 6610
    505,. 508,
    525.2, 508.1
    552.1,
    515.1
    506,
    525.2
    506, 525.2
    504.1,
    551
    515.2,
    555, 515.1
    549.1
    548.1
    505,
    508,
    504.1
    551
    547,
    6651
    505, 508, 525.2,
    508.1
    505, 508, 525.2,
    508.1
    525.2, 508.1
    8
    .

    Contaminant
    Method
    1-lexachi
    orobènzene
    Hexachi
    orocyci
    opentadi
    ene
    Lindane
    Methoxych.lor
    Oxamyl
    PCBs
    (as
    decachlorobiphenyl)
    2
    (as
    Aroclors)
    Pentachi
    orophenol
    Picloram
    Simazine
    Toxaphene
    Total
    Trihalomethanes
    508.1
    508.1
    508.1
    508:.
    1
    505,
    508,
    525.2,
    505,
    525.2,
    508,
    505,
    508,
    525.2,
    .505,
    508,
    525.2,
    531.1,
    6610
    508A
    505,
    508
    515.2,
    525.2,
    555,
    515.1
    515.2,
    555,
    515.1
    5051,
    507,
    525.2,
    508.1
    505,
    508,
    525.2
    502.2,
    524.2,
    551
    1
    A
    nitrogen—phosphorous
    detector
    should
    be
    substituted
    for
    the
    electron
    capture
    detector
    in
    Method
    505
    (or
    another
    approved
    method
    should
    be
    used)
    to
    determine
    alachior,
    atrazine
    and
    simazine,
    if
    lower
    detection
    limits
    are
    required.
    2
    PCBs
    are
    qualitatively
    identified
    as
    Aroclors
    and
    measured
    for
    compliance
    purposes
    as
    decachlorobiphenyl
    using
    Method
    508A.
    Methods
    502.2,
    505,
    507,
    508,
    508A,
    515.1
    and 531.1
    are
    in
    Methods
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Organic
    Compounds
    in
    Drinking
    Water,
    EPA—600/4—88—039,
    Revised,
    July
    1991.
    Methods
    506,
    547,
    550,
    550.1
    and
    551
    are
    the Determination
    of
    Organic
    Compounds
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    December
    1988,
    in
    Methods
    for
    Supplement
    I,
    EPA/600—4—90/020,
    July
    1990.
    549.1,
    552.1and
    555
    are in
    Methods
    for
    the
    in
    Drinkina
    Water
    Sunolement
    II
    -
    EPA/600/R—92/129,
    August
    1992.
    Method
    1613
    is
    titled,
    “Tetra—Through
    Octa—Chlorinated
    Dioxins
    and
    Furans
    by
    Isotope
    Dilution
    HRGC/HRMS,!r
    EPA
    821—B—94—005,
    October
    1994.
    These
    documents
    are
    available
    from
    the
    National
    Technical
    Information
    Service,
    (NTIS)
    PB91—231480,
    PB91—146027,
    PB92—207703
    and
    PB95—104774,
    U.S.
    Department
    of
    Commerce,
    5285
    Port
    Royal
    Road,
    Springfield,
    Virginia
    22161.
    The
    toll—free
    number
    is
    800—553—6847.
    EPA
    Methods
    504.1,
    508.1
    and
    525.2
    are
    available
    from
    USEPA
    EMSL—Cincinnati.,
    Cincinnati,
    OFF
    45268.
    The
    phone
    number
    is
    (513)—569—7586.
    Method
    6651
    is contained
    in the
    18th
    edition
    of
    Standard
    Methods
    for
    the
    Examination
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,
    1992,
    and
    Method6610
    is
    contained
    in the
    Supplement
    to the
    18th
    edition
    of Standard
    Methods
    for
    the
    Examination
    of
    Footnotes
    Methods
    515.2,
    524.2,
    548.1,
    Determination
    of
    Oroanic
    Comnounds
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,
    1994,
    American
    Public
    Health
    Association,
    1015
    Fifteenth
    Street
    NW,
    Washington,
    D.C.
    20005.
    9

    METHODS FOR
    UNREGULATED
    CONTAMINANTS
    Regulations
    specified
    in
    §141.40
    require monitoring
    for certain
    contaminants
    to
    which
    maximum
    contaminant levels do not apply.
    These,
    chemicals are
    called “unregulated” contaminants, and
    presently include
    sulfate,
    34 volatile
    organic chemicals (VOCs) and 13 synthetic organic
    chemicals
    (SOCs).
    1.
    Analysis
    for
    the
    34 unregulated VOCs listedunder
    paragraphs (e) and
    (j)
    of
    §141.40 shall be conducted using
    the following
    recommended
    methods,
    or
    their
    equivalent as determined by EPA.
    VOC
    Contaminants
    Method
    Chloroform
    502.2,
    524.2,
    551
    Bromodichioromethane
    502.2, 524.2, 551
    Bromoform
    502.2,
    524.2, 551
    Chiorodibromomethane
    502.2, 524.2, 551
    Bromobenzene
    502.2, 524.2
    Bromochioromethane
    502.2, 524.2
    Bromomethane
    502.2,. 524.2
    n—Butylbenzene
    502.2, 524.2
    sec—Butylbenzene
    502.2, 524.2
    tert—Butylbenzene
    502.2,
    524.2
    Chioroethane
    502.2, 524.2
    Chloromethane
    502.2, 524.2
    o—Chlorotoluene
    502.2, 524.2
    p—Chlorotoluene
    502.2, 524.2
    Dibromomethane
    502.2,
    524.2
    m—Dichlorobenzene
    502.2, 524.2
    Dichiorodifluoromethane
    502.2,
    524.2
    1,1—Dichloroethane
    502.2,
    524.2
    1,3—Dichloropropane
    502.2, 524.2
    2,2—Dichloropropane
    502.2,
    524.2
    1,1—Dichioropropene
    502.2,
    524.2
    1,3—Dichioropropene
    502.2,
    524.2
    Fluorotrichioromethane
    502.2, 524.2
    Hexachiorobutadiene
    502.2,
    524.2
    Isopropylbenzene
    502.2,
    524.2
    p—Isopropyltoluene
    502.2, 524.2
    Naphthalene
    502.2, 524.2
    n—Propylbenzene
    502.2, 524.2
    1,1,2,2—Tetrachloroethane
    502.2, 524.2
    1,1,1,2—Tetrachloroethane
    502.2,
    524.2
    1,2,3—Trichlorobenzene
    502.2,
    524.2
    1,2,3—Trichloropropane
    502.2,
    524.2, 504.1
    1,2,4-Trimethylbenzene
    502.2, 524.2
    1,3,5—Trimethylbenzene
    502.2,
    524.2
    10

    METHODS
    FOR UNREGULATED
    CONTAMINANTS
    (CONT.)
    2.
    Analysis
    for
    the
    13
    unregulated
    SOCs
    listed
    under
    of
    .141.40
    shall
    be
    conducted
    using
    the
    following.
    methods.
    Soc
    Contaminants
    Method
    A1.dicarb
    Aldicarb
    sulfone
    Aldicarb
    sulfoxide
    Aidrin
    Butachior
    C
    arbaryl
    Dicamba
    Dieldrin
    3—Hyd
    roxycarbo
    furan
    Methomyl
    Metol
    achi Or
    Metri
    buzi
    n
    Propachl
    or
    531.1,
    6610.
    531.1,
    6610
    531.1,
    6610
    505,
    508,
    525.2,
    508.1
    507,
    525.2
    531.1,
    6610
    515.1,
    515.2,
    555
    505,
    508,
    525.2,
    508.1
    531.1,
    6610
    531.1,
    6610
    507,
    525.2,
    508.1
    507,
    5252,
    508.1
    508,
    525.2,
    508.1
    Other
    mandatory
    and
    optional
    procedures
    for
    conducting
    analyses
    of
    unregulated
    VOCs
    and
    SOCs
    are
    described
    in
    Sections
    IV
    and.V,
    respectively,
    of
    this
    Technical
    Notes
    document.
    Sources.
    for
    EPA
    Methods
    502.2,
    504.1,
    505,
    507,
    508,
    508.1,
    515.1,
    515.2,
    524.2,
    525.2,
    531.1
    and 551,
    and
    Standard
    Method
    6610
    are
    referenced
    above
    under
    methods
    for
    organic
    chemicals.
    3.
    Analysis
    for
    the
    unregulated
    inorganic
    contaminant
    listedunder
    paragraph
    (n)(12)
    •of
    §141.40
    shall
    be
    conducted
    Using
    the
    following
    recommended
    methods.
    Contami
    nant
    Analytical’
    Method
    1
    EPA
    ASTM
    SM
    300.0
    D4327—91
    4110
    375.2
    0516—90
    4500—S0
    4
    —F
    4500—S0
    4
    —E
    1.
    Sources
    for
    the
    Standard
    Methods
    and
    ASTM
    sulfate
    inethodsare
    referenced
    above
    under
    methods
    for
    inorganic
    chemicals.
    The
    EPA
    methods
    are
    contained
    in
    “Methods
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Inorganic
    Substances
    in
    Environmental
    Samples,”
    EPA/600/R—93/100,
    August
    1993,
    which
    is
    available
    at
    NTIS,
    PB94—
    121811.
    paragraph
    (n)
    (11)
    recommended
    Sulfate
    11

    METHODS
    FOR
    FILTRATION
    AND
    DISINFECTION
    1.
    Microbiological,
    pH,
    and
    Turbidity
    Methods
    To
    comply
    with
    provisions
    of
    the
    Surface
    Water
    Treatment
    Rule
    monitoring
    under
    Subpart
    H
    of
    40
    CFR
    Part
    141,
    public
    water
    systems
    must
    conduct
    analyses
    of
    total
    coliforms,
    fecal
    coliforms,
    heterotrophic
    bacteria,
    turbidity,
    and
    temperature
    in
    accordance
    with
    one
    of
    the
    following
    analytical
    methods,
    and
    by
    using
    mandatory
    procedures
    for
    turbidimeter
    calibration,
    which
    are
    specified
    in
    Section
    IV
    of
    this
    Technical
    Notes
    document.
    Approved
    methods
    for
    pH
    are
    described
    above
    under
    “Methods
    for
    Inorganic
    Contaminants.”
    Organism
    Methodology
    Citation
    1
    Total
    Coliforms
    2
    Total
    Coliform
    Fermentation
    9221A, B,
    C
    Techni
    que
    3
    4
    5
    Total
    Coliform
    Membrane
    Filter
    9222A,
    B,
    C
    Technique
    ONPG—MUG
    Test
    6
    9223
    Fecal
    Coliforms
    2
    Fecal
    Coliform
    MPN
    Procedure
    7
    9221E
    Fecal
    Coliform
    Membrane
    Filter
    92220
    Procedure
    Heterotrophic
    Pour
    Plate
    Method
    9215B
    bacteria
    2
    Turbidity
    Nephelometric
    Method
    2130B
    Nephelometric
    Method
    180.18
    Great
    Lakes
    Instruments
    Method
    2
    Temperature
    2550
    Footnotes
    1
    Except
    where
    noted,
    all
    methods
    refer
    to
    the
    18th
    edition
    of
    Standard
    Methods
    for
    the
    Examination
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,
    1992,
    American
    Public
    Health
    Association,
    1015
    Fifteenth
    Street
    NW,
    Washington,
    D.C.
    20005.
    2
    The
    time
    from
    sample
    collection
    to
    initiation
    of
    analysis
    may
    not exceed
    8
    hours.
    Lactose
    broth,
    as
    commercially
    available,
    may
    be
    used
    in
    lieu
    of
    lauryl
    tryptose
    broth,
    if
    the
    system
    conducts
    at
    least
    25
    parallel
    tests
    between
    this
    medium
    and
    lauryl
    tryptose
    broth
    using
    the
    water
    normally
    tested,
    and
    this
    comparison
    demonstrates
    that
    the
    false—positive
    rate
    for
    total
    coliforms,
    using
    lactose
    broth,
    is
    less
    than
    10%.
    Media
    should
    cover
    inverted
    tubes
    at
    least
    one—half
    to
    two—thirds
    after
    the
    sample
    is
    added.
    No
    requirement
    exists
    to
    run
    the
    completed
    phase
    on
    10
    percent
    of
    all
    total
    coliforin—positive
    confirmed
    tubes.
    6
    The
    ONPG—MUG
    Test
    is
    also
    known
    as
    the
    Autoanalysis
    Colilert
    System.
    12

    A—I
    Broth
    may
    be
    held
    up
    to
    3
    months
    in
    a
    tightly
    closed
    screwcap
    tube
    4CC.
    at
    8
    “Methods
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Inorganic
    Substances
    in
    Environmental
    Samples,”
    EPA—600/R—93—100,
    August
    1993.
    Available
    at
    NTIS,
    P894—121811.
    GLIMethod
    2,
    “Turbidity,”
    November
    2,
    1992,
    Great
    Lakes
    Instruments,
    8855
    Inc.,
    North
    55th
    Street,
    Milwaukee,.
    Wisconsin
    53223.
    2.
    Disinfectant
    Residual
    Methods
    Public
    water
    systems
    must
    measure
    residual
    disinfectant
    concentrations
    with
    one
    of
    the
    analytical
    methods
    in
    the
    following
    table.
    The
    methods
    are
    contained
    in
    the
    18th
    edition
    of
    Standard
    Methods.
    Corrections
    tO
    SM—4500—Cl—
    E
    and
    4500—Cl—G,
    and
    procedures
    for
    conducting
    continuous
    measurements
    of
    chlorine
    residuals
    are
    described
    in
    the
    Technical
    Notes
    in
    Section
    IV
    of
    this
    document.
    Residual’
    Methodology
    Methods
    Free
    Chlorine
    2
    Aniperometric
    Titration
    4500—Cl
    0
    DPD
    Ferrous
    Titrirnetric
    4500—Cl
    F
    DPD
    Colorimetric
    4500—Cl
    G
    Syringaldazine
    (FACTS)
    4500—Cl
    I-I
    Total
    Chlorine
    2
    Amperomêtric
    Titration
    4500—Cl
    D
    Amperometric
    Titration
    4500—Cl
    E
    (low
    level
    measurement)
    DPD
    Ferrous
    Titrimetric
    4500—Cl
    F
    .
    DPD
    Colorimetric
    4500—Cl
    G
    lodometric
    Electrode
    4500—Cl
    I
    Chlorine
    Dioxide
    Amperometric
    Titration
    4500—dO
    2
    C
    DPD
    Method
    4500—Cl0
    2
    0
    Amperometric
    Titration
    4500—dO
    2
    E
    Ozone
    Indigo
    Method
    4500—O.
    B
    Footnotes
    1
    if
    approved
    by
    the
    State,
    residual
    disinfectant
    concentrations
    for
    free
    chlorine
    and
    combined
    chlorine
    also
    may
    be
    measured
    by
    usng
    DPIJ
    colorimetric
    test
    kits.
    2
    Free
    and
    total
    chlorine
    residuals
    may
    be
    measured
    continuously
    by
    a
    adapting
    specified
    chlorine
    residual
    method
    for
    use
    with
    a
    continuous
    monitoring
    instrument
    provided
    the
    chemistry,
    accuracy,
    and
    precision
    of
    the
    measurement
    remain
    same.
    Instruments
    used
    for
    continuous
    monitoring
    must
    be
    calibrated
    with
    a
    grab
    sample
    measurement
    at
    least
    every
    5
    days,
    or
    with
    a
    protocol
    approved
    by
    the
    State.
    13

    SECTION
    II.
    METHODS
    TO BE
    WITHDRAWN
    ON JULY
    1,
    1996
    For
    convenience
    and
    clarity,
    the
    methods to
    be withdrawn
    on
    July
    1,
    1996
    are
    specified
    in
    this
    document
    in
    lieu
    of listing
    them
    in
    the drinking
    water
    regulations
    at
    40 CFR Part
    141.
    The following
    methods
    may
    be used
    to obtain
    certification
    and
    to
    analyze
    drinking
    water compliance
    samples
    until
    July
    1,
    1996.
    However,
    if
    the
    rule,
    which
    promulgates
    this
    withdrawal
    action,
    is
    published
    after
    January
    1, 1995,
    the
    withdrawal
    date
    becomes
    18
    months after
    publication
    of
    the final
    rule
    in the
    Federal
    Register.
    ANALYTICAL
    METHODS
    TO
    BE
    WITHDRAWN
    FOR
    INORGANIC
    CONTAMINANTS
    In
    addition
    to
    methods
    cited at
    §141.23(k)(1),
    the
    methods
    in the
    following
    table
    only are
    approved
    until July
    1,
    1996
    for analyses
    for
    antimony,
    arsenic,
    barium,
    beryllium,
    cadmium,
    cyanide,
    fluoride,
    mercury,
    nickel,
    nitrate,
    nitrite,
    selenium,
    sodium
    and
    thallium.
    These
    methods
    were
    previously
    specified
    at §141.23(k)(1),
    except
    arsenic,
    fluoride
    and sodium,
    which
    were
    previously
    specified
    at §141.23(k)(2),
    §141.23(k)(3)
    and
    §141.41(c),
    respectively.
    Antimony
    6
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    204.2
    Arsenic
    4
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    206.2
    Hydride—Atomic
    Absorption
    206.3
    Spectrophotometric
    206.4
    D—2972—88A
    Barium4
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Direct
    208.1
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    208.2
    Beryllium
    4
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    210.2
    Cadmium
    6
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    213.2
    Chromium
    4
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    218.2
    Manual
    Distillation
    followed
    by
    Spectrophotometri
    c
    Manual
    Amenable,
    Spectrophotometric
    Fluoride
    Manual
    Distill.;
    Color.
    SPADNS
    Manual
    Electrode
    Automated
    Alizarin
    Contaminant
    Methodology
    EPA
    1
    ASTM
    2
    SM
    3
    307B
    Cyanide
    335.2
    335.1
    340.1
    340.2
    340.3
    14
    0

    Mercury
    4
    Manual,
    Cold
    Vapor
    V
    245.1
    Nickel
    4
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Direct
    249.1
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    V
    249.2
    Nitrate
    Manual
    Cadmium
    Reduction
    353.3
    Automated
    Hydrazine
    Reduction
    353.1
    Nitrite
    Manual
    Cadmium
    Reduction
    353.3
    Spectrophotometric
    V
    354.1
    Selenium
    4
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    270.2’
    Thallium
    4
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    279.2
    Sodium
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Direct
    273.1
    Atomic
    Absorption;
    Furnace
    V
    273.2
    Flame
    Photometric
    V
    D1428—64a
    320A
    Footnotes
    V
    V
    V
    V
    1
    “Methods
    for
    Chemical
    Analysis
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastes,”
    EPA—600/4—79—020,
    March
    1983.
    Available
    at
    NTIS,
    publication
    order
    number
    PB84—128677.
    V
    .
    2
    Annual
    Book
    of
    ASTM
    Standards,
    Part
    31,
    American
    Society
    for
    Testing
    and
    Materials,
    1916
    Race
    Street,
    Philadelphia,
    PA
    19103.
    Methods
    320A and
    307B
    are
    contained
    in
    the
    14th
    (1975)
    and
    16th
    (1985)
    editions,
    respectively,
    of
    Standard
    Methods
    for
    the
    Examination
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,
    American
    Public
    Health
    Association,
    1015
    Fifteenth
    Street,
    Washington,
    D.C.
    20005.
    V
    V
    Several
    spectrochemical
    techniques
    are
    approved
    for
    the
    determination
    of
    metal
    and metalloid
    contaminants
    in
    drinking
    water.
    These
    techniques
    are:
    inductively
    V
    coupled plasma—atomic
    emission
    spectrometry;
    inductively
    coupled
    plasma—mass
    spectrometry;
    direct
    aspiration
    flame,
    graphite
    furnace,
    and
    platform
    graphite
    furnace
    atomic
    absorption
    spectrometry.
    To
    conduct
    these
    measurements,
    samples
    must
    not
    be
    filtered
    prior
    to
    either
    sample
    digestion
    or
    “direct
    analysis.”
    V
    Samples
    are
    acid preserved
    with
    nitric
    acid
    to
    pH less
    than
    2,
    held
    for
    16
    hours,
    and the
    pH
    verified
    to
    be
    less
    than
    2
    before
    sample
    processing
    is
    V
    V
    started.
    In
    addition,
    the
    turbidity
    of
    the
    acidified
    sample
    must
    be
    measured
    with
    an
    approved
    method,
    and
    after
    preservation
    is
    complete.
    If
    turbidity
    is
    greater
    than
    1
    nephelonietric
    turbidity
    unit
    (NTU),
    sample
    digestion
    is
    required
    using
    the
    digestion
    procedure
    described
    in
    the
    approved
    method
    (except
    the
    perchioric
    acid
    digestion
    in
    SM
    3114B
    must
    not
    be
    used).
    If the
    acid
    preserved
    sample
    contains
    turbidity
    less
    than
    1
    NTU,
    the
    sample
    may
    be
    analyzed
    by
    “direct
    analysis”
    without
    digestion.
    However,
    irrespective
    of
    the
    turbidity
    of
    the
    sample,
    when
    determining
    mercury
    by
    cold
    vapor
    atomic
    absorption
    (CVAA),
    or
    antimony,
    arsenic,
    or
    selenium
    (Sb,
    As,
    and
    Se)
    by
    gaseous
    hydride
    atomic
    V
    absorption,
    sample
    aliquotsmust
    be
    digested
    prior
    to analysis.
    Digestion
    is
    necessary,
    because
    organomercury
    compounds
    that
    may be
    present
    in drinking
    water
    and
    performance
    samples
    cannot
    be
    analyzed
    by
    CVAA
    unless
    converted
    to
    inorganic
    15

    mercury,
    and
    because
    Sb,
    As,
    and
    Se
    each
    must
    be
    converted
    to
    a
    specific
    valence
    For
    state
    the
    prior
    determination
    to
    reduction
    of
    chromiumand
    generation
    by
    graphite
    of
    the
    furnace
    hydride
    analysis,
    for
    analysis.
    an
    appropriate
    volume
    of
    30%
    hydrogen
    peroxide
    (1—mL
    of
    30%
    2
    H
    02
    per
    100
    mL of
    sample
    or
    standard) should
    be
    added
    to
    the
    calibration
    standards
    and
    the
    sample
    prior
    to
    analysis. The
    addition
    of hydrogen
    peroxide
    ensures
    that
    chromium
    in
    the
    sample
    and
    calibration standards
    is in
    the
    same
    valence
    state
    fCr(III)).
    This
    provides
    uniform
    signal
    response
    in conventional
    off—the—wall
    graphite
    furnace
    determinations
    of chromium.
    Also,
    calcium
    concentrations
    ranging from
    10
    to
    50
    mg/L
    have
    demonstrated
    a
    nonuniform
    suppressive.
    (less
    than
    20%)
    matrix
    effect
    in
    conventional
    off—the—wall
    nonpyrolytic
    graphite
    furnace
    determinations
    of
    chromium.
    If
    calcium
    is
    present
    at these
    concentrations
    in
    the
    chromium
    sample,
    use
    of
    the
    matrix
    modifier
    magnesium nitrate
    is
    highly
    recommended
    (cf.
    SM
    3113A).
    6
    Thedistillatfon
    procedure
    in
    EPA
    Method
    335.2
    should
    not
    be
    use,
    and
    the
    sodium
    hydroxide absorber
    solution
    final
    concentration
    must
    be
    adjusted
    to 0.25
    N
    For
    before
    graphitecolorimetric
    furnace
    determinations
    analysis.
    of
    selenium
    when
    nickel
    nitrate
    is used
    as
    the
    matrix
    modifier,
    an
    appropriate
    volume
    of
    30%
    hydrogen
    peroxide
    (2—mL
    30%
    H
    202
    per
    100
    niL of
    sample
    or
    standard)
    should
    be
    added
    to both
    the
    calibration
    standards and samples
    prior
    to
    analysis.
    It
    has
    been
    demonstrated
    that
    the
    addition
    of
    hydrogen
    peroxide
    enhances
    the
    absorption
    signal
    response
    in
    conventional
    off—the—wall
    graphite
    furnace
    determinations
    of
    selenium.
    If
    digestion
    of
    the
    sample
    is
    required,
    because
    sample
    turbidity
    is
    greater
    than
    1
    NTU,
    hydrogen
    peroxide
    is added
    to
    the
    sample
    at the
    time
    of
    digestion.
    Nickel
    nitrate
    (Ni
    conc.
    of
    0.1%)
    either
    is
    added
    to
    an aliquot
    of
    the
    processed
    sample
    and
    calibration standards
    at the
    time
    of
    analysis
    or
    may
    be added
    directly
    in
    the furnace (20
    jg
    Ni
    per
    20
    jiL injection).
    16
    I,

    ANALYTICAL METHODS
    TO
    BE
    WITHDRAWN
    FOR
    LEAD,
    COPPER,
    AND
    CORROSI.VITY
    In
    addition to the
    methods
    cited
    at
    §141.23(k)(1),
    thie
    methods
    in
    the
    following
    table
    are
    approved
    until
    July
    1,
    1996
    for
    analyses
    for lead,
    copper,
    conductivity,
    calcium, alkalinity,
    orthophosphaté
    and
    silica.
    These
    methods
    were
    previously specified
    on
    June
    30,
    1994
    (59
    FR
    33863)
    at
    §141.89(a)..
    Contaminant
    Methodology
    EPA
    1
    Lead
    2
    Atomic
    absorption;
    furnace
    technique
    239.2
    Copper
    2
    Atomic
    absprption;
    furnace
    technique
    220.2
    Atomic
    absorption;
    direct
    aspiration
    220.1
    Conductivity
    Conductance
    120.1
    Calcium
    2
    EDTA
    titrimetric
    .
    215.2
    Atomic
    absorption;
    direct
    aspiration
    215.1
    Alkalinity
    Titrimetric
    31.0.1
    Orthophosphate
    Colorimetric,
    ascorbic
    acid,
    two
    365.3
    (Unfiltered,
    reagent
    .
    no
    digestion
    Colorimetric.,
    ascorbic
    acid,
    single
    365.2
    or
    hydrolysis)
    Silica
    Colorimetric
    370.1
    Footnotes
    1
    “Methods for
    Chemical
    Analysis
    of Water
    and
    Wastes,”
    EPA—600/4—79—020,
    March
    2
    1983.
    Available
    at
    NTIS
    as
    PB84—128677.
    To
    conduct
    these
    measurements
    samples
    must
    not
    be
    filtered
    prior
    to
    either
    sample
    digestion or
    “direct
    analysis.”
    Samples
    are
    acid
    preserved
    with
    nitric
    acid
    to
    pH
    less
    than
    2,
    held
    for
    16
    hours,
    and
    the
    pH
    verified to
    be
    less
    than
    2
    before
    sample
    processing is
    started.
    In
    addition,
    the
    turbidityof
    the
    acidified sample
    must
    be
    measured
    using
    an approved
    method,
    and
    after
    acid
    preservation
    is complete.
    If
    turbidity
    is greater
    than
    1 nephelornetric
    turbidity
    unit
    (NT1J),
    sample
    digestion
    is
    required
    using
    the
    digestion
    procedure described
    in
    the
    approved method.
    If
    the
    acid
    preserved
    sample
    contains turbidity
    less
    than
    1 NTU,
    the
    sample
    may
    be
    analyzed
    by
    “direct
    analysis”
    without
    digestion.
    When
    digestion
    is
    required,
    the
    total
    recoverable
    technique
    as
    defined
    in
    the
    method
    must
    be
    used.
    17

    ANALYTICAL
    METHODS
    TO
    .BE
    WITHDRAWN
    FOR
    ORGANIC
    CONTAMINANTS
    In
    addition
    to
    methods
    cited
    at
    §141.24(e),
    the
    methods
    specified’
    in
    the
    following
    table
    may
    be
    used
    until
    July
    1,
    1996
    for
    analysis
    of
    the
    contaminants
    specified
    below.
    Methods
    502.1, 503.1
    and
    524.1
    are
    containedin
    Methods
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Organic
    Compounds
    in
    Drinking
    Water,
    EPA/600/4—88/039,
    December
    1988,
    Revised,
    July
    2991, which
    is’
    available
    from
    the
    National
    Technical
    Information
    Service
    (NTIS),
    PB91—231480,
    U.S.
    Department
    of
    Commerce,
    5285
    Port
    Royal
    Road,
    Springfield,
    Virginia
    22161.
    The
    phone number is
    800—553—6847.
    Methods 501.1
    and
    501.2
    for
    analysis
    of
    total trihalomethanes
    in
    accordance
    with
    the
    monitoring
    requirements
    specified
    at
    §141.30
    will
    be
    printed
    at
    40
    CFR
    141.30,
    Appendix
    C
    until
    July
    1,
    1995.
    Contaminant
    EPA
    Method
    Benzene
    503.1,
    Carbon
    tetrachloride
    502.1,
    Chi
    orobenzene
    502.
    1,
    1,2—Dichlorobenzene
    502.2,
    1,
    4—Di
    chl
    orobenzene
    502.
    1,
    1,2—Dichioroethane
    502.1,
    cis—Dichioroethylene
    502.1,
    trans—Di cM
    oroethyl ene
    502.
    1,
    Dichioromethane
    502.1,
    1,2—Dichloropropane
    502.1,
    Ethylbenzene
    503.1,
    Styrene
    503.1,
    Tetrachi
    oroethyl
    ene
    502.
    1,
    1,1,1—Trichioroethane
    502.1,
    Trichloroethylene
    502.1,
    Toluene
    503,1,
    1,2,
    4—Tn chl
    orobenzene
    503.1
    1,
    1—Di
    chi
    oroethyl
    ene
    502.1,
    1,1,2—Tnichioroethane
    502.1,
    Vinyl chloride
    502.1,
    Xylenes
    (total)
    503.1,
    Total Trihalomethanes
    501.1,
    §141.40(g),
    EPA
    Methods
    502.1,
    503.1
    and
    for
    analysis
    of
    the
    unregulated
    VOC
    40(e)
    and
    (j),
    if
    the
    contaminant
    is
    method.
    These
    VOC
    methods
    are
    contained
    organic
    contaminants,
    524.1
    524.1
    503.1,
    524.1
    524.1
    503.1,
    524.1
    524.1
    524.1
    524.1
    524.1
    524.1
    524.1
    524.1
    503.1,
    524.1
    524.1
    503.1,
    524.1
    524.1
    524.1
    524.1
    524.1
    524.1
    501.2
    ANALYTICAL
    METHODS
    TO
    BE
    WITHDRAWN
    FOR
    UNREGULATED
    VOCS
    In
    addition
    to
    methods
    cited
    at
    524.1
    may
    be
    used until
    July
    1,
    1996
    contaminants
    that
    are
    listed
    in
    §141.
    listed
    in
    the
    analytical
    scope
    of
    the
    in
    the
    EPA
    manual described
    above
    for
    I.
    18
    0

    METHOD
    TO’BE
    WITHDRAWN
    FOR
    FILTRATION
    AND
    DISINFECTION
    In
    addition
    to
    methods
    cited
    at
    §141.74(a)(5),
    Standard
    Method
    408F
    (Leuco
    Crystal
    Violet)
    may
    only
    be
    used
    until
    July
    1,
    1996
    for analysis
    of
    free
    chlorine
    and
    combined
    chlorine
    (chioramines).
    This
    method
    is
    contained
    in
    the
    16th
    edition
    of
    Standard
    Methods
    for the
    Examination
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,
    1985,
    American
    Public
    Health
    Association,
    10[5
    Fifteenth
    Street
    NW,
    Washington,D.C..20005.
    19

    SECTION
    III.
    RECOMMENDED
    METHODS
    FOR
    SECONDARY
    DRINKING
    WATER
    CONTAMINANTS
    Analyses
    of
    aluminum,
    chloride,
    copper,
    fluoride,
    foaming
    agents,
    iron,
    manganese,
    odor,
    silver,
    sulfate, total
    dissolved
    solids
    (TDS)
    and
    zinc
    to
    determine
    compliance
    under
    §143.3
    may be
    conducted
    with.the
    methods
    in
    the
    following
    Table.
    Criteria
    for
    analyzing
    aluminum,
    copper,
    iron,
    manganese,
    silver,
    and zinc
    samples
    with
    digestion
    or
    directly
    without
    digestion,
    and
    other
    mandatory
    procedures
    are
    contained
    in
    the
    Technical
    Notes
    in
    Section
    IV
    of
    this
    document.
    Measurement
    of
    pH
    may
    be
    conducted
    with
    one
    of
    the
    methods
    listed
    above
    in
    Section
    I
    under
    “Methods
    for
    Inorganic
    Chemicals.”
    Contaminant
    EPA
    ASTM
    1
    SF1
    2
    Other
    Aluminum
    2OO.7
    3120B
    2OO.8
    31138
    2OO.9
    3111D
    Chloride
    3OO.O
    D4327—91
    4110
    4500—CY—D
    Color
    21208
    Copper
    2OO.7
    D1688—90A
    31208
    2OO.8
    D1688—90C
    3111B
    2OO.9
    3113B
    Fluoride
    3OO.O
    D4327—91
    4110
    129—71W
    5
    D1179—93A
    4500F—B,D
    380—75WE
    5
    D1179—938
    4500F—C
    4500F—E
    Foaming
    Agents
    5540C
    Iron
    200.7
    3120B
    2O0.9
    3111B
    3113B
    Manganese
    200.7
    3120B
    200.8
    3111B
    200.9
    31138
    Odor
    2150B
    Silver
    200.7
    3120B
    I372O856
    2OO.8
    3111B
    20O.9
    3113B
    Sulfate
    300.O
    D4327—91
    4110
    375.2k
    4500—S0
    4
    —F
    4500—S0
    4
    —C,D
    20

    Contaminant
    EPA
    ASTM
    1
    SM
    2
    Other
    TDS
    2540C
    Zinc
    2O0.7
    3120B
    2O0.8
    3111B
    Footnotes
    Annual
    Book
    of ASTM
    Standards,
    Vols.
    11.01
    and
    11.02,
    American
    Society
    for
    Testing
    and
    Materials,
    1916
    Race
    Street,
    Philadelphia,
    PA
    19103.
    2
    18th
    edition
    of
    Standard
    Methods
    for
    the
    Examination
    of Water
    and
    Wastewater,
    1992,
    American
    Public
    Health
    Association,
    1015
    Fifteenth
    Street
    NW, Washington,
    D.C.
    20005.
    “Methods
    for
    the Determination
    of
    Metals
    in
    Environmental
    Samples
    Supplement
    I,”
    EPA—600/R—94—111,
    May
    1994.
    Available
    at
    NTIS,
    P894—184942.
    “Methods
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Inorganic
    Substances
    in
    Environmental
    Samples,”
    EPA—600/R—93—100,
    August
    1993.
    Available
    at
    NTIS,
    P894—121811.
    Industrial
    Method
    No.
    129—71W,
    “Fluoride
    in Water
    and
    Wastewater,”
    December
    1972,
    and
    Method
    No. 380—75WE,
    “Fluoride
    in
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,”
    February
    1976,
    Technicon
    Industrial
    Systems,
    Tarrytown,
    NY
    10591.
    6
    Available
    from
    Books
    and Open—File
    Reports
    Section,
    U.S.
    Geological
    Survey,
    Federal
    Center, Box
    25425,
    Denver,
    CO
    80225—0425.
    21

    SECTION
    IV.
    MANDATORY
    METHOD
    MODIFICATIONS
    This section
    contains
    several
    mandatory
    method
    modifications
    in a
    series
    of Technical
    Notes.
    Each Technical
    Note
    is on
    a
    separate
    sheet
    to
    allow
    users
    to remove
    it, and
    place
    it with
    the applicable
    compliance
    method(s).
    The
    parenthetical
    number
    (R),
    which appears
    adjacent
    to
    methodcitations
    in
    this
    section,
    refers
    to the
    publication
    in
    Section
    VI
    (References)
    that
    contains
    the
    referenced
    method.
    Tech. Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    22
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    STANDARD
    METHOD
    (SM)
    4500—C1—E
    (R12),
    CHLORINE
    RESIDUALS
    This
    Technical
    Note
    corrects
    a typographical
    error
    in SM
    4500—Cl—E,
    “Low
    Level
    Amperometric
    Titration”
    (R12).
    This
    method
    is
    currently
    approved
    at
    §141.74(a)
    for measurement
    of
    chlorine
    residuals.
    When
    the
    method
    is
    republished,
    the
    Standard
    Methods
    Committee
    will
    correct
    an
    error
    1
    in the
    numerical
    factor
    in the
    denominator
    of
    the
    formula
    in part
    5
    of the
    method.
    The
    formula
    is
    on
    page
    +-43
    of
    the
    18th edition
    of
    Standard
    Methods.
    The
    correct
    formula
    must
    have
    a
    factor
    of 0.00564,
    which
    is
    10
    times
    greater
    than
    the
    factor
    printed
    in the
    incorrect
    formula.
    1
    Letter
    from
    Andrew
    D..
    Eaton,
    “Error
    in
    4500—Cl
    E,”
    June
    4,1993,
    American
    Public
    Health
    Association,
    1015
    Fifteenth
    Street
    NW, Washington,
    D.C.
    20005.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    OW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    — Section
    IV
    23
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    STANDARD
    METHOD
    (Sri)
    4500—Cl—G
    (R12),
    CHLORINE
    RESIDUALS
    This
    Technical
    Note
    recognizes
    and corrects
    an
    error
    in SM
    4500—Cl—G
    (R12).
    This
    DPD method
    is
    currently
    approved
    at
    §141.74(a)
    for
    measurement
    of
    •chlorine
    residuals.
    The
    method
    as.
    published
    omits
    instructions
    that
    would
    allow
    measurement
    of
    total
    residual
    chlorine
    in drinking
    water
    samples.
    The
    Standard Methods
    Committee
    has deterniined
    1
    that an
    editorial
    omission,
    not
    a
    technical
    change,
    occurred
    in recent
    versions
    of
    this
    method.
    The
    error
    will
    be corrected
    in
    the
    next
    (19th)
    edition
    of
    Standard
    Methods.
    The
    simplified
    procedure,
    which
    uses
    DPD chemistry,
    was
    omitted
    from
    SM
    4500—Cl—G
    (18th
    ed., para.
    4,
    p.
    4—46).
    EPA
    corrects,
    the,
    Standard
    Method
    error,
    by
    printing
    a
    correction
    to
    paragraph
    four below.
    . The
    correction
    also
    applies
    to
    the
    16th
    edition
    version
    of this
    method,
    SM 408E.
    Simplified
    Procedure
    for
    Total
    Chlorine
    “To obtain
    monochloramine
    and
    dichioramine
    together
    as combined
    chlorine
    omit
    step
    4d
    in
    SM
    4500—Cl-G
    (monochioramine
    determination).
    To
    obtain
    total
    chlorine
    in
    one
    reading
    add
    the
    full
    amount
    of potassium
    iodide
    at
    the
    start
    with
    the’
    specified
    amounts
    of
    buffer.
    reagent
    and
    DPD
    indicator.
    Read
    color
    after
    2
    minutes..”
    1
    Letter
    from
    Andrew
    D.
    Eaton,
    ‘inquiry
    on
    Chlorine
    Residual
    4500—Cl
    (18th
    Edition),”
    October
    26, 1993,
    American
    Public
    Health
    Association,
    1015
    Fifteenth
    Street
    NW,
    Washington,
    D.C.
    20005.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    — Section
    IV
    24
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    PROTOCOL
    FOR
    CONTINUOUS
    CHLORINE
    RESIDUAL
    MONITORING
    In
    this
    Technical
    Note
    EPA
    provides
    specifications
    for
    continuous
    monitoring
    of
    chlorine
    residuals.
    These
    instructions
    were
    inadvertently
    omitted
    from the
    Surface
    Water
    Treatment
    Rule
    (54
    FR
    27486,
    June
    29,
    1989).
    EPA
    will
    permit
    a
    grab
    sample
    method,
    which
    is
    approved
    for
    chlorine
    residual
    monitoring at
    §141.74(a), to
    be
    adapted
    for
    continuous
    monitoring
    of
    free
    or
    total
    chlorine
    residuals
    provided
    the
    chemistry,
    accuracy,
    and
    precision
    of
    the method
    are unchanged.
    Instruments
    used for
    continuous
    monitoring
    must
    be
    calibrated
    with
    a
    grab
    sample
    measurement
    at
    least
    every
    5
    clays,
    or
    with
    a
    protocol
    approved
    by
    the
    State.
    If
    the
    State
    alsoapproves,
    calibration
    may
    include
    minor changes
    in
    the
    reagent
    mix
    provided
    the
    overall
    chemistry
    of
    the
    method
    is
    not
    changed.
    Approved
    grab
    sampling
    methods
    for
    chlorine
    residual.
    measurement
    are
    listed
    below.
    Free Chlorine
    Ampe’ometric
    Titration
    4500—Cl
    D
    DPD
    Ferrous
    Titrimetric
    .
    4500—Cl
    F
    DPD
    Colorimetric
    4500—Cl
    G
    Syringaldazine
    (FACTS)
    4500—Cl
    H
    Total
    Chlorine
    Amperometric
    Titration
    4500—Cl
    0
    .
    Amperometric
    Titration
    4500—Cl
    E
    (low
    level
    measurement)
    DPD
    Ferrous
    Titrimetric
    4500—Cl
    F
    DPD
    Colorimetric
    4500—Cl
    G
    todometric
    Electrode
    4500—Cl
    I
    1
    If
    approved
    by
    the
    State,
    residual
    disinfectant
    concenrations
    for
    free
    chlorine
    and
    combined
    chlorine
    also
    may
    be
    measured
    by
    using
    DPD
    colorimetric
    test
    kits.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications
    Residual’
    Methodology
    Methods
    25

    SPECTROP[IOTOMETRIC
    DETERMINATIONS
    OF
    CYANIDE
    Mandatory
    Manual
    Distillation
    in
    Cyanide
    Methods
    In
    this
    Technical
    Note
    EPA
    emphasizes
    that
    spectrophotometric
    measurements
    of cyanide
    in
    water
    samples
    always
    require
    a
    manual
    digestion
    of
    the
    sample
    to
    prepare
    the sample
    for
    measurement
    of
    cyanide.
    EPA
    believes
    emphasis
    is
    needed,
    because
    some
    laboratories
    seem
    to
    be
    unaware
    of
    this
    requirement.
    All approved
    spectrophotometric
    methods
    for
    cyanide
    are
    specified
    at 40
    CFR
    141.23(k)(1)
    under
    the
    phrase,
    “Manual
    distillation
    followed
    by.”
    Standard
    Method
    SM—4500—CN—C
    (R12),
    which
    describes
    the
    mandatory
    manual
    distillation
    procedure,
    is
    cited
    in
    the
    rules
    immediately
    after
    this
    phrase.
    Amenable”
    spectrophotometric
    methods
    also
    requiredistillation
    prior
    to
    either
    free
    or total
    cyanide
    measurements.
    The
    approved
    amenable,
    manual
    and
    automated
    spectrophotometric
    methods
    for
    cyanide
    are
    ASTM
    D2036—91B
    and
    D2036—
    91A
    CR11);
    SM
    4500—CN—F
    and
    4500—CN—G
    (R12);
    EPA
    Methods
    335.1,
    335.2
    and
    335.3
    CR14),
    EPA
    335.4
    (R4);
    and
    USGS
    1—3300—85
    (R19).
    (Note:
    EPA
    Methods
    335.1
    and
    335.2
    will
    be
    withdrawn
    on
    July
    1,
    1996,
    and Method
    335.3
    has
    been
    replaced
    by
    Method
    335.4).
    To
    avoid
    manual
    distillation,
    laboratories
    can
    use
    a
    selective
    electrode
    method
    for
    cyanide,
    which
    is
    discussed
    below.
    Selective
    Electrode
    Method,
    SM
    4500—CN—F,
    (R12)
    EPA
    regulates
    free,
    not
    total,
    cyanide.
    If
    SM
    4500—CN—F
    is
    used
    to
    determine
    free
    cyanide,
    constant
    ionic
    strength
    background
    distillation
    for
    is
    the
    not
    electrode
    required.
    measurement,
    However,
    to
    samples
    maintain
    and
    a
    standards
    must contain
    the
    same
    concentration
    of
    sodium
    hydroxide.
    Reduced
    Volume
    Cyanide
    Distillation
    In
    1994
    EPA Method
    335.3.was
    replaced
    with
    Method
    335.4.
    The
    technical
    differences
    between
    the
    methods
    are
    minor;
    both
    methods
    require
    manual
    distillation
    of
    the
    sample.
    However,
    EPA
    improved
    the
    automation
    of
    procedures.
    in.
    Method
    335.4,
    and added
    an
    optional,
    reduced
    volume
    distillation
    procedure.
    Method
    335.4
    does
    not
    contain
    the
    discussion
    in
    Method
    335.3
    of
    an
    alternate
    ultraviolet
    (UV) digestion
    procedure,
    because
    approved
    this
    optional
    UV
    procedure,
    and
    because
    EPA
    believes
    that
    UY
    digestion
    will
    underestimate
    cyanide
    concentrations
    in
    the
    drinking
    water
    sample.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    26
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    In
    this
    Technical
    Note,
    EPA
    is
    approving
    reduced
    volume
    distillation
    for
    all
    spectrophotonietric
    cyanide
    methods.
    Criteria
    for
    reduced
    volume
    distillation
    are
    as
    follows.
    “Reduction
    in
    digestion
    or
    distillation
    volumes
    is
    &ceptable
    provided
    all
    sample—to—reagent
    ratios
    are
    maintained,
    and
    provided
    the
    final
    sample
    volume
    is
    sufficient
    for
    instrumental
    measurement
    of
    cyanide.
    Reduced
    volume
    considered
    an acceptable
    distillation
    minor
    apparatus,modification
    when
    employed
    to
    approvedas
    described,
    cyanide
    can
    be
    methodology.”
    EPA Method
    335.2
    (R14)
    This
    method
    will
    be
    withdrawn
    on
    July
    1, 1996.
    ThisTechnical
    Note
    amends
    Method
    335.2
    as follows.
    The
    sodium
    hydroxide
    absorber
    solution
    final
    concentration
    must
    be
    adjusted
    to
    0.25
    N
    before
    colorimetric
    analysis.
    The
    distillation
    procedure
    that
    is
    described
    in
    the
    method
    should
    not
    be
    used,
    because
    it
    uses
    a
    secondary
    scrubber
    that
    does
    not
    work
    well.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    Octobór
    1994
    Section
    IV
    27
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    TURBIDIMETER
    CALIBRATION
    (R4,
    R9,
    R12)
    EPA
    Method
    180.1
    (R4), SM
    21308
    CR12)
    and
    GLI
    Method
    2
    (R9)
    are
    approved
    at
    §141.74(a)
    for
    measurement
    of
    turbidity.
    This
    TechnicalNote
    specifies
    that
    calibration
    of
    the
    turbidimeter
    must
    be
    made
    either
    by
    the
    use
    of
    a
    formazin
    standard
    as
    specified
    in
    the
    approved
    method
    or
    with
    a
    styrene
    divinylbenzene
    polymer
    standard
    (Amco
    AEPA—1
    Polymer).
    This
    reagent
    is
    commercially
    available
    from
    Advance
    Polymer
    Systems,
    Inc., 3696
    Haven
    Avenue,
    Redwood
    City,
    California
    94063.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    28
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    SAMPLE
    DIGESTION
    FOR
    DETERMINATION
    OF
    METAL
    CONTAMINANTS
    This
    Technical
    Note
    describes
    when
    and how
    a
    sample
    must
    be
    digested
    for
    accurate
    compliance
    measurements
    of
    metals
    in
    drinking
    water
    samples.
    Several
    spectrochemical
    techniques
    are approved
    for
    the
    determination
    of
    metal
    and
    metalloid
    contaminants
    in
    drinking
    water.
    These
    techniques
    are:
    inductively
    coupled
    plasma—atomic
    emission
    spectrometry;
    inductively
    coupled
    plasma—mass
    spectrometry;
    direct
    aspiration
    flame,
    graphite
    furnace,
    and
    platform
    graphite
    furnace
    atomic
    absorption
    spectrometry.
    To
    conduct
    these
    measurements,
    samples
    must
    not
    be
    filtered
    prior
    to
    either
    sample
    digestion
    or
    “direct
    analysis.”
    Samples
    are
    acid
    preserved
    with
    nitric
    acid
    to
    pH
    less
    than
    2.
    Preservation
    is
    complete
    after
    the
    acidified
    sample
    has
    been
    held for
    16
    hours.
    Before
    sample
    processing
    is
    started,
    sample
    pH
    must
    be
    verified
    to
    be
    less
    than
    2.
    To
    determine
    whether digestion
    of
    the
    sample
    is
    required,
    the
    turbidity
    of
    the
    acidified
    sample
    must be
    measured
    using
    an
    approved
    method
    and
    only
    after
    preservation
    is
    complete.
    If
    turbidity
    is
    greater
    than
    1
    nephelometric
    turbidity
    unit (NTU),
    sample
    digestion
    is
    required
    using
    the
    digestion
    procedure
    described
    in
    the
    approved
    method
    (see
    exception
    below
    for
    SM
    3114B).
    If
    the acid
    preserved
    sample
    contains
    turbidity
    less
    than
    1
    NTIJ,
    the
    sample
    may
    be
    analyzed
    by
    “direct
    analysis”
    without
    digestion.
    However,
    irrespective
    of
    the
    turbidity
    of
    the
    sample,
    when
    determining
    mercury
    by
    cold
    vapor atomic
    absorption
    (CVAA),
    or
    antimony
    (Sb),
    arsenic
    (As)
    or
    selenium
    (Se)
    by
    gaseous
    hydride
    atomic
    absorption,
    sample
    aliquots
    must
    be
    .
    digested
    prior to
    analysis.
    Digestion
    of
    the
    sample,
    which
    is
    described
    in
    the
    applicable
    method
    1
    ,
    is
    necessary,
    because
    organomercury
    compounds
    that
    may
    be
    present
    in
    drinking
    water
    and
    performance
    samples
    cannot
    be
    analyzed
    by
    CVAA
    unless
    converted
    to
    inorganic
    mercury,
    and
    because
    Sb,
    As,
    and
    Se
    each
    must
    be
    converted
    to
    a
    specific
    valence
    state
    prior
    to
    reduction
    and
    generation
    of
    the
    hydride
    for
    analysis.
    ‘SM
    31148
    Exception
    When
    determining
    arsenic
    or
    seleniumusing
    gaseous
    hydride
    SM
    31148
    (R12), the
    perchloric
    acid
    digestion
    should
    never
    be
    used.
    See
    the
    Technical Note
    on
    “SM
    3114B,
    Arsenic
    and
    Selenium”
    for
    additional
    instructions and explanations.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    29
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    STANDARD
    METHOD
    3114B (R12),
    ARSENIC
    AND SELENIUM
    This
    Technical
    Note describes
    an
    important
    safety
    warning
    when
    using
    sample
    digestion
    procedures
    that are
    described
    in
    SM 3114B
    (R12).
    Determination
    of arsenic
    and
    selenium
    by
    gaseous
    hydride,
    atomic
    absorption
    requires
    digestion
    of
    the sample
    prior
    to
    analysis.
    SM 3114B
    describes
    two
    digestion
    procedures.
    One
    procedure,
    referred
    to
    as the
    :“t0t
    recoverable”
    preparation,
    uses
    perchioric
    acid
    in
    the
    final
    stage
    of digestion.
    This
    perchioric
    acid
    digestion
    procedure
    is not
    reciuired
    by
    EPA,
    and should
    be
    avoided,
    because
    of
    potential
    danger
    when
    using
    perchioric
    acid,
    and
    because
    a
    special
    fume hood
    is
    required.
    When
    using
    method SM
    3114B, the
    digestion
    procedure
    described
    in
    paragraph
    4.d,
    Preparation
    of samples
    and standards
    for
    total
    arsenic
    and
    selenium,
    that specifies
    the
    use
    sulfuric
    acid
    and
    potassium
    persulfate
    should
    be
    utilized.
    This
    warning
    is not
    applicable
    to
    the ASTM
    gaseous
    hydride
    methods
    for
    arsenic
    and selenium,
    because
    the
    methods
    do
    not
    allow
    use of
    perchloric
    acid
    digestion.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    30
    Mandatory’
    Method
    Modifications

    ASTM
    D3859—93B
    (Ru)
    AND STANDARD
    METHOD
    3113B
    (R12),
    SELENIUM
    This
    Technical
    Note
    concerns
    graphite
    furnace
    determinations
    of
    selenium
    with
    ASTM
    D3859—93B
    CR11) or
    SF1
    31138
    (R12).
    When
    nickel
    nitrate
    is
    used
    as
    the
    matrix
    modifier,
    an
    appropriate
    volume
    of
    30%
    hydrogen
    peroxide
    (2-mL
    30%
    K
    02
    per
    100 mL
    of
    sample
    or
    standard)
    should
    be
    added
    to
    both
    the
    calibration
    standards
    and
    samples
    prior
    to
    analysis.
    It
    has
    been
    demonstrated
    that
    the
    addition
    of
    hydrogen
    peroxide
    enhances
    the
    absorption
    signal
    response
    in
    conventional
    off—the—wall
    graphite
    furnace
    determinationsof
    selenium..
    If
    digestion
    of
    the
    sample
    is
    required,
    because
    sample
    turbidity
    is
    greater
    than
    1
    NTU,
    hydrogen
    peroxide
    is
    added
    to
    the
    sample
    at
    the
    time
    of
    digestion.
    Nickel
    nitrate
    (Ni
    conc.
    of
    0.1%)
    either
    is
    added
    to
    an
    aliiquot
    of
    the
    processed
    sample
    and
    calibration
    standards
    at
    the
    time
    of
    analysis
    or
    may
    be
    added
    directly
    in
    the
    furnace
    (20
    ,g
    Ni
    per
    20
    ,L
    injection).
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    31
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    STANDARD METHOD
    3113B
    (R12),
    CHROMIUM
    This
    Technical Note
    describes
    procedures
    for
    correctly
    conducting
    a
    graphite
    furnace determination
    of
    chromium
    in
    a
    drinking
    water
    sample
    using
    SM
    3113B
    (R12). The
    method
    requires
    that
    an
    appropriate
    volume
    of
    30%
    hydrogen
    peroxide (1—mL
    of
    30%
    H
    202
    per
    100
    mL
    of
    sample
    or
    standard)
    be
    added
    to
    the
    calibration
    standards
    and
    the
    sample prior
    to
    analysis.
    The
    addition
    of
    hydrogen peroxide
    ensures that
    chromium
    in
    the
    sample
    and
    calibration
    standards is
    in
    the
    same
    valence
    state,
    chromium
    [III].
    This
    provides
    uniform
    signal response
    in
    conventional
    off—the—wall
    graphite
    furnace
    determinations
    of
    chromium.
    Calcium concentrations
    ranging from
    10
    to
    50
    mg/L
    have
    demonstrated
    a
    nonuniform suppressive
    (less
    than
    20%)
    matrix
    effect
    in
    conventional
    off—the—
    wall
    nonpyrolytic
    graphite
    furnace determinations
    of
    chromium.
    If calcium
    is
    present
    at
    these
    concentrations
    in
    the
    chromium
    sample,
    use
    of
    the
    matrix
    modifier
    magnesium
    nitrate
    is
    highly
    recommended
    (cf.
    SM
    3113A).
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    32
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    METHODS 502.2 (R16)
    AND
    524.2
    (R3),
    SORBENT
    TRAPS
    This
    Technical
    Note
    describes
    under
    what
    conditions
    an
    alternate
    trap
    may
    be
    used
    in
    EPA
    Methods
    502.2,
    Rev.
    2.0
    (R16)
    and
    524.2,
    Rev.
    4.0.
    (R3).
    Both
    methods
    allow use
    of
    alternative
    sorbents
    to
    trap
    volatile
    organic
    compounds,
    provided
    all
    quality
    assurance
    criteria
    specified
    in
    the
    method
    are
    met.
    This
    option
    is
    already included
    in
    Method
    524.2
    in
    Sect.
    :6.2.2,
    but
    an
    explicit
    requirement
    not
    to
    change
    other
    method
    conditions
    is
    missing.
    EPA
    notes
    that
    some
    alternate
    traps
    may
    not
    work
    under
    Method
    502.2
    or
    524.2
    conditions,
    because
    the
    purge
    and
    desorption
    procedures
    specified
    in
    the
    methods
    are
    optimized
    for
    the
    trap
    media
    specified
    in
    the
    methods.
    These
    procedures
    may
    not
    be
    changed.
    Specifically,
    the
    purge time,
    purge
    gas
    flow
    rate,
    and
    the
    desorption
    time
    specified
    in
    the
    method
    may
    not
    be
    changed,
    because
    EPA
    has
    no
    data
    to
    show
    that
    reliable
    or
    reproducible
    results
    can
    be
    obtained
    if
    purging
    or
    desorption
    times
    or
    flows
    differ
    from
    the
    specified
    limits.
    The
    purging
    and
    desorption
    conditions
    for
    these
    methods
    were
    designed
    to
    achieve analytical
    maximum efficiency.
    The
    purge
    time
    and
    purge
    gas
    flow
    rate
    required
    to
    efficiently
    purge the
    target
    analytes
    from
    the
    water
    sample
    are
    largely independent
    of
    the
    sorbent
    trapping
    material.
    Decreasing
    the
    purging
    or
    desorption
    times
    or
    gas
    flows
    will
    decrease
    purging
    efficiency
    and/or
    recovery
    of
    target analytes,
    which will
    have
    a
    negative
    impact
    on
    method
    precision.
    Since
    many of
    the
    potential
    alternate
    sorbents
    may
    be
    thermally
    stable
    at
    temperatures
    higher
    than
    80°C,
    alternate
    traps
    may
    be
    desorbed
    and
    baked
    out
    at
    higher temperatures
    than
    those
    described
    in
    the
    current
    method
    revisions.
    If
    higher temperatures
    are
    used,
    the
    analyst
    should monitor
    the
    data
    for
    analyte and
    trap
    decomposition.
    This
    Technical
    Note
    amends
    Method
    502.2,
    Rev.
    2.0
    by
    adding
    the
    following
    sentence
    to
    the
    end
    of
    Sect.
    6.2.2.
    “The
    use
    of
    alternative
    .sorbents
    is
    acceptable
    provided
    the
    data
    acquired
    meets all
    quality
    control
    criteria
    described
    in
    Section
    10,
    and
    provided
    the
    purge
    and
    desorption
    procedures
    specified
    in
    Section
    11
    of
    the
    method
    are
    not
    changed.”
    Method
    524.2, Rev.
    4.0
    is
    amended
    by
    changing
    the
    last
    sentence
    in
    Sect.
    6.2.2 to
    read
    as
    follows.
    “The
    use
    of
    alternative
    sorbents
    is
    acceptable
    provided
    the
    data
    acquired
    meets
    all
    quality control
    criteria
    described
    in
    Section
    9’,
    and
    provided
    the
    purge and
    desorpt
    ion
    procedures
    spe’cified
    in
    Section
    11
    of
    the
    method
    are
    not
    changed.”
    Tech.’Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    — Section
    IV
    33
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    .
    EPA
    METHODS
    502.2,
    REV. 2.0
    (R16),.
    524.2,
    REV.
    4.0
    (R3),
    AND
    551
    (R15)
    IN
    SAMPLE ACIDIFICATION
    This Technical
    Note
    clarifies
    that
    samples
    must
    be
    acildified at
    the
    time
    of
    collection,
    but after
    they
    have
    been
    dechlorinated.
    Ac]dification
    must
    not
    be
    delayed
    until the
    samples
    are received,
    in
    the
    laboratory.
    These
    instructions
    supersede
    instructions
    implied
    or
    explicit
    that
    may
    be
    contained
    in
    the methods.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods’
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    34
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    METHOD
    506
    (R15),
    ERRATA
    IN
    SUMMARY
    This
    Technical
    Note
    corrects
    minor
    errors
    in
    the
    introductory
    sections
    of
    Method
    506
    (R15),
    and
    emphasizes
    that
    clean
    sodium
    chloride
    is
    essential
    to
    an
    accurate
    analysis.
    Method
    506
    is
    used
    to
    determine
    adipates
    and
    phthalates
    in
    drinking
    water
    samples.
    The
    summary
    in
    Section
    2
    of
    Method
    506
    incorrectly
    refers
    to
    use
    of
    a
    ternary
    solvent
    mixture
    to
    conduct
    the
    liquid—liquid
    extraction
    of
    the
    sample;
    the
    correct
    procedure
    is
    methylene
    chloride
    followed
    by
    hexane.
    .
    The
    method
    summary
    also
    omits
    a
    disk
    elution
    solvent.
    Section
    2
    is
    amended
    to
    correct
    these
    errors,
    and
    now
    reads
    in
    entirety
    as
    follows.
    “A
    measured
    volume
    of
    sample,
    approximately
    1—L,
    is
    extracted
    with
    methylene
    chloride
    followed
    by
    hexane
    using
    a
    glass
    separatory
    funnel.
    The
    solvent
    extract
    is
    isolated,
    dried
    and
    concentrated
    to
    a
    volume
    of
    mL
    5
    or
    less.
    The
    extract
    is
    further
    concentrated
    by
    using
    a
    gentle
    stream
    of
    nitrogen
    gas
    to
    reduce
    the
    sample
    volume
    to
    1
    mL
    or
    less.
    Alternatively,
    a
    measured
    volume
    of
    sample
    is
    extracted
    with
    a
    liquid—
    solid
    extraction
    (LSE)
    cartridge
    or
    disk.
    The
    LSE
    media
    are
    eluted
    with
    acetonitrile
    followed
    by
    methylene
    chloride
    (disk
    extraction)
    or
    with
    methylene
    chloride
    only
    (cartridge
    extraction).
    The
    eluant
    is
    concentrated
    using
    a
    gentle
    stream
    of
    nitrogen
    gas
    or
    clean
    air
    to
    reduce
    the
    volume
    to
    1
    mL
    or
    less.
    The
    analytes
    in
    the
    extract
    are
    separated
    by
    means
    of
    capillary
    gas
    chromatography
    using
    temperature
    programming.
    The
    chromatographically
    separated
    phthalate
    and
    adipate
    esters
    are
    measured
    with
    a
    photolonization
    detector,
    which
    is
    operating
    at
    10
    eV,”
    EPA
    strongly
    encourages
    laboratories
    to
    clean
    the
    sodium
    chloride
    that
    is
    added
    to
    the
    sample
    by
    carefully
    following
    the
    heating
    and
    storage
    instructions,
    which
    are
    described
    at
    Sect.
    7.5
    of
    the
    method.
    This
    will
    reduce
    the
    background
    contaminatih
    measured
    in
    the
    laboratory
    reagent
    blank
    samples.
    Tech.
    I1otes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    35
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    IIETHOD
    508
    (R16),
    DCPA
    AND
    HEXACHLOROCYCLOPENTADIENE
    This
    Technical
    Note
    approves
    Method
    508,
    Rev.
    3.0
    (R16)
    for
    compliance
    measurement
    of
    hexachiorocyclopentadiene,
    provided
    the
    method
    performance
    criteria
    specified
    in
    Section
    9
    of
    Method
    508.1
    (R6)
    are
    met.
    This
    Note.
    also
    corrects
    a
    missing
    entry
    in
    the
    table
    of
    analytes
    in
    Sect.
    1.1
    of
    Method
    508;
    the
    CAS
    Registry
    number
    for
    DCPA
    (dacthal)
    is
    1861—32—1.
    Tech.
    1otes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    36
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    METHODS
    515.1
    (R16)
    AND
    515.2
    (R3),
    USE
    OF
    TMSD
    This
    Technical
    Note
    allows
    and
    describes
    use
    of
    triniethylsilyl—
    diazomethane
    (TMSD)
    as
    an
    alternative
    derivatizing
    reagent
    in
    Methods
    515.1,
    Rev.
    4.0 (R16)
    and
    515.2,
    Rev.
    1.0
    (R3).
    EPA
    is
    approving
    TMSD,
    because
    some
    laboratories
    prefer
    not
    to
    use the
    other
    approved
    derivatizing
    reagent,
    Diazald.
    Since
    TMSD increases
    gas
    chromatographic
    background,
    the
    method
    surrogate,
    2,4—dichlorophenylacetic
    acid,
    cannot
    be
    used
    at
    concentrations
    of
    1
    jg/L
    or
    lower.
    Also,
    Diazald,
    not
    TMSD,
    must
    be
    used
    if
    dalapon
    is
    to
    be
    determined,
    because
    dalapon
    is
    not
    amenable
    to
    esterification
    with
    TMSD.
    If
    dalapon
    recovered
    from
    the
    drinking
    water
    sample
    is
    incompletely
    esterified,
    dalapon concentrations
    will
    be
    underestimated.
    Laboratories
    wishing
    to
    avoid
    use
    of
    Diazald
    may use
    Method
    552.1
    to
    determine
    dalapon,
    and
    Method
    515.1
    or
    515.2
    or
    555
    for the
    other
    chlorinated
    acid
    herbicides.
    Steps,
    which
    replace
    or
    augment
    the
    calibration
    and
    extract
    esterification
    (Sect.
    11.4)
    method
    descriptions
    when
    TMSD
    is
    used,
    are
    dQscribed
    below.
    The following
    procedure
    was
    written
    for
    Method
    515.2,
    which
    uses liquid—solid
    extraction
    (LSE).
    Analysts
    using
    TMSD
    with
    liquid—liquid
    extraction
    (LLE)
    Method
    515.1
    should
    omit
    steps
    specific
    to
    LSE,
    and
    include
    appropriate
    LLE steps
    from
    Method
    515.1.
    In
    particular,
    the
    amounts
    of
    TMSD,
    acetic
    acid,
    and internal
    standards
    to
    be
    added
    may have
    to
    be
    adjusted
    when
    the
    TMSD
    procedure
    is
    adapted
    for
    use
    with
    Method
    515.1.
    These
    adjustments
    may be
    necessary,
    if
    the concentration
    ratio
    of
    original
    sample
    to
    final
    extract
    is
    different
    in
    the two
    methods.
    USE
    OF
    TRIMETHYLSILYLDIAZOMETHANE
    TO
    ESTER
    1FY
    ACID
    HERBICIDES
    IN
    METHOD
    515.21,2
    1.
    INTRODUCTION
    Trirnethylsilyldiazomethane
    (TMSD)
    is
    available
    from
    acoinmercial
    supplier
    (currently
    the
    Aldrich
    Chemical
    Company
    is
    the
    sole
    supplier)
    as
    a
    2
    molar
    solution
    in
    hexane.
    TMSD
    is
    stable
    during
    storagein
    this
    solution.
    It
    should
    be
    noted
    that
    the
    gas
    chromatographic
    background
    is
    somewhat
    increased
    when
    TMSD
    is
    used
    as
    the
    derivatizing
    reagent
    instead
    of
    the
    generated
    diazomethane.
    Although
    no
    method
    analyte
    is
    affected
    by
    this
    increased
    background,
    the
    recommended
    surrogate,
    2,4—dichloro—
    phenylacetic
    acid,
    is
    masked
    by
    an
    interfering
    peak.
    This
    renders
    the
    surrogate
    useless
    at
    1
    tg/L or
    lower.
    Any
    compound
    found
    suitable
    when
    TMSD
    is
    used
    is
    acceptable
    as
    a
    surrogate.
    Trimethylsilyldiazomethane
    can
    be
    used
    to
    efficientlymethylate
    the
    following
    acid
    herbicides:
    Tech.
    •Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    37
    Mandatory
    1ethod
    Modifications

    Chemical
    CAS
    Registry
    Nurnr
    Acifluorofen
    50594—66—6
    Bentazon
    25057—89—0
    Chioramben
    133—90—4
    Dacthal.
    1861—32—1
    Dicaniba
    1918—00—9
    Dichiorprop
    120—36—5
    Dinoseb
    88—85—7
    3,5—Dichlorobenzoic
    acid
    51—36—5
    2,4—D
    94—75—7
    2,4—DB
    94—82-6
    5—Hydroxydicamba
    7600—50—2
    Pentachi
    orophenol
    87—86—5
    Picloram
    1918—02—1
    2,4,5—TI’
    (Silvex)
    93—72—1
    2,4,5—T
    93—76—5
    TMSD
    may
    not
    be used
    to
    esterify
    dalapon.
    The following
    procedures
    to
    methylate
    the
    herbicides
    mast
    be
    followed.
    2.
    CALIBRATION
    OF
    THE
    GAS
    CHROMATOGRAPH/ELECTRON
    CAPTURE
    I)ETECTION
    (GC/ECD)
    SYSTEM
    Calibrate
    the GC/ECD
    system
    using
    fortified
    reagent
    water
    samples,
    and
    use two
    sets
    of
    calibration
    solutions
    to
    prevent
    coelution.
    The
    presence
    of
    coeluting
    analytes
    makes
    confirmation
    of
    positives
    mandatory
    before
    taking
    action
    on
    a
    result.
    Follow
    the
    procedure
    described
    below
    using
    TMSD to
    niethylate
    the
    herbicides.
    Five
    concentration
    levels
    are
    recommended.
    3.
    PROCEDURE
    Carry
    out
    the
    hydrolysis,
    clean—up,
    and
    extraction
    of
    the
    method
    analytes
    as described
    in
    Method
    515.2
    up
    to
    Sect.
    11.2.4,
    or
    inMethod
    515.1
    up
    to
    Sect.
    11.4.
    Users
    of Method
    515.1
    should
    begin
    below
    where
    the
    2
    M
    TMSD
    solution
    is
    added.
    Elute
    the
    herbicides
    from
    the
    disk
    by
    passing
    two
    2
    mLaliquots
    of
    methyl
    tertiary
    butyl
    ether
    (MTBE)
    through
    the
    disk
    into
    the
    collection
    tube.
    Rinse
    the
    sample
    container
    with
    4
    niL
    of
    MTBE
    and
    pass
    it
    through
    the
    disk
    into
    the
    tube.
    Transfer
    the
    MTBE
    extract
    from
    the
    collection
    tube
    intal
    an
    anhydrous
    sodium
    sulfate
    drying
    tube
    which
    has
    been
    pre—wetted
    with
    I
    niL
    MTBE.
    Be
    sure
    to
    discard
    any water
    layer.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    38
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    Before
    the
    extract
    passes
    completely
    through
    the
    sodium
    sulfate,
    add
    an
    additional
    2
    mL
    of
    MTBE
    as
    a
    rinse.
    Concentrate
    the
    dried
    extract
    to
    approximately
    4
    mL.
    Add
    methanol
    (approx.
    1
    niL)
    to
    the
    extract
    to
    yield
    a
    20%
    (v/v)
    methanol
    in
    MTBE
    solution.
    Adjust
    the
    volume
    to
    5
    niL
    with
    MTBE.
    (TMSD
    produces
    the
    most
    efficient
    methylation
    of
    the
    herbicides
    in
    a
    20%
    methanol,
    80%
    MTBE
    solution.)
    Add
    50
    jiL
    of
    the
    2
    N
    TMSD
    solution
    to
    each
    5
    mL
    sample
    extract.
    (Verify
    this
    volume
    if
    Method
    515.1
    is
    used.)
    Place
    the
    tube
    containing
    the
    extract
    into
    a
    heating
    block
    at
    50°C
    and
    heat
    the
    extract
    for
    1
    hour.
    Allow
    the
    extract
    to
    cool
    to
    room
    temperature,
    then
    add
    100
    #L
    of
    2
    N
    acetic
    acid
    in
    methanol
    to
    react
    any
    excess
    TMSD.
    (Verify
    this
    volume
    if
    Method
    515.1
    is
    used.)
    Fortify
    the
    extract
    with
    100
    itL
    of
    the
    internal
    standardsolution
    (Method
    515.2,
    Sect.
    7.17;
    Method
    515.1,
    Sect.
    7.19)
    to
    yield
    a
    concentration
    of
    0.020
    g/mL.
    (Verify
    this
    if
    Method
    515.1
    is
    used.),
    Proceed
    with
    the
    identification
    and
    measurement
    of
    the
    analytes
    using
    GC/ECD
    according
    to
    the
    procedures
    described
    in
    the
    method.
    1
    “Use
    of
    Trimethylsilyld’iazomethane
    as
    a
    Substitute
    Reagent
    for
    the
    Esterification
    of
    Phenoxy
    Herbicides,”
    J.
    Collins
    and
    W.J.
    Bashe,
    Technology
    Applications,
    Inc.,
    July
    27,
    1993
    [Project
    performed
    under
    EPA
    Contract
    68-Cl—
    0022,
    J.W.
    Eichelberger,
    Work
    Assignment
    Manager]
    2
    Amounts
    of
    TMSD,
    acetic
    acid,
    internal
    standards
    and
    other
    reagents
    may
    have
    to
    be
    adjusted
    when
    the
    TMSD
    procedure
    is
    adapted
    for
    use
    with
    Method
    515.1.
    These
    adjustments
    will
    be
    necessary,
    if
    the
    concentration
    ratio
    of
    original
    sample
    to
    final
    extract
    is
    different
    in
    the
    two
    methods.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    OW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    39
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    METHOD
    524.2,
    REV.
    4.0
    (R3)
    QUALITY
    ASSURANCE,
    VOC
    DATA
    .
    This
    Technical
    Note
    corrects
    or
    clarifies
    quality
    assurance
    steps
    in
    Method
    524.2,
    Rev.
    4.0
    (R3),
    and
    provides
    data
    for
    two
    VOCs
    that
    was
    omitted
    in
    the
    published
    method.
    Changes
    in
    Quality
    Assurance
    Procedures
    EPA
    is
    changing
    some
    instruttions
    in
    Sections
    9
    (quality
    control)
    and
    10
    (calibration)
    of
    Method
    524.2
    that
    may
    be
    conflicting
    or
    confusing.
    The
    changes
    described
    in
    this
    Note
    also
    apply
    to
    Method
    502.2,
    Rev.
    2.0
    (R16) to
    the
    extent that
    the
    same
    problems
    are
    in
    the
    quality
    control
    (Section
    10)
    and
    calibration (Section
    9).
    Section
    9.3, Initial
    Demonstration
    of
    Accuracy
    ——
    EPA
    has
    been asked
    to
    make the
    accuracy
    criteria
    (±20%),
    which
    are
    part
    of
    an
    initial
    demonstration
    of
    capability
    (IDC),
    in
    Sect.
    9.3.3
    of
    Method
    524.2
    the
    same
    as
    the
    accuracy
    criteria
    (±30%).
    in
    the
    section
    on
    continuing
    calibration
    checks
    (Sect.
    10.3.5).
    These
    criteria
    will
    not
    be
    changed.
    EPA
    specified
    different
    criteria,
    because
    the
    IDC
    and
    Continuing
    Calibration
    measurements
    are
    evaluating
    different
    controls.
    EPA
    believes
    the
    IDC
    measurement,
    which requires
    analysis
    of
    a
    series
    of
    laboratory
    fortified
    blanks,
    should
    be
    more
    accurate
    than
    the
    Continuing
    Calibration
    measurement.
    To
    explain
    this
    difference
    in
    accuracy
    criteria,
    and
    to
    remove
    an
    incomplete
    reference
    to
    the
    SDWA,
    Sect.
    9.3.3
    is
    revised
    in
    this
    Note,
    Section
    9.3.3
    is
    superseded
    in
    its
    entirety
    as
    follows:
    “Some
    analytes,
    particularly
    early
    elating
    gases
    and
    late
    elating
    higher
    molecular
    weight compounds,
    will
    be
    measured
    with
    less
    accuracy
    and
    precision
    than other
    analytes.
    However,
    the
    accuracy
    and
    precision
    for
    all
    analytes
    must
    fall
    within
    the
    limits
    expressed
    below.
    If
    these
    criteria
    are
    not
    met
    for
    an
    analyte
    of
    interest,
    take
    remedial
    action
    and
    repeat the
    measurements
    for
    that
    analyte
    until
    satisfactory
    performance
    is
    achieved.
    For
    each analyte,
    the
    mean
    accuracy
    must
    be
    80—120%
    (i.e.
    an
    accuracy
    of
    ±
    20%).
    The
    precision
    of
    the
    recovery
    (accuracy)
    for
    each
    analyte
    must
    be
    less
    than twenty
    percent
    (<20%).
    These
    criteria
    are
    different
    than the
    ±
    30%
    response
    factor
    criteria
    speâified
    in
    Sect.
    10.3.5.
    The criteria
    differ,
    because
    the
    measurements
    in
    Sect.
    9.3.3
    as
    part
    of
    the
    initial
    demonstration
    of
    capability
    should
    be
    more
    stringent
    than
    the
    continuing
    calibration
    measurements
    in
    Sect.
    10.3.5.”
    Section 9.6
    LFB
    Criteria
    ——
    This
    step
    in
    Method 524.4
    requires
    a
    single
    laboratory
    fortified
    blank
    (LFB)
    to
    be
    measured
    with
    each
    batch
    of
    samples,
    and
    with
    a,n
    accuracy
    that
    is
    specified
    in
    Sect. 9.3.3
    (i.e.
    ±20%),
    whereas
    Sect.
    10.3.5
    requires
    the
    same
    sample
    be
    analyzed
    with
    an
    accuracy
    of
    ±30%.
    EPA
    is
    removing
    this
    conflict
    by
    changing
    the
    accuracy
    requirement
    to
    be
    ±30%
    in
    Sect.
    9.6.
    Tech.
    ‘Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    40
    Mandatory
    1ethod
    Modifications

    Section
    9.6 is
    superseded
    in
    its
    entirety
    as
    follows:
    “Use
    the procedures
    and
    criteria
    in
    Sects.
    10.3.4
    and
    10.3.5
    to
    evaluate
    the
    accuracy
    of
    the measurement
    of
    the
    laboratory
    fortified
    blank
    (LFB),
    which
    must
    be
    analyzed
    with
    each
    batch
    of
    samples
    that
    is
    processed
    as
    a
    group
    within
    a
    work
    shift.
    If
    more
    than
    20
    samples
    arein
    a
    work
    shift
    batch,
    analyze
    one
    LFB
    per 20
    samples.
    Prepare
    the
    LFB
    with
    the
    concentration
    of
    each analyte
    that
    was
    used
    in the
    Sect.
    9.3.3
    analysis.
    If
    the acceptable
    accuracy
    for
    this
    measurement
    (±30%)
    is
    not
    achieved,
    the problem
    must
    be
    solved
    before
    additional
    samples
    may be
    reliably
    analyzed.
    Since
    the calibration
    check
    sample
    in
    Sect.
    10.3:5
    and
    the
    LFB
    are
    made
    the same
    way and since
    procedural
    standards
    are
    used,,
    the
    sample
    analyzed
    here
    may
    also
    be
    used
    as
    the
    calibration
    check
    in
    Sect.
    10.3.5.
    Add
    the
    results
    of
    the
    LFB
    analysis
    to
    the
    control
    charts
    to
    document
    data
    quality.”
    Section
    9.5
    LRB Analysis
    ——
    This
    step
    in
    Method
    524.2
    states
    that
    a
    field
    reagent
    blank
    may
    be
    used
    in
    lieu
    of
    a
    laboratory
    reagent
    blank
    (LRB).
    This
    is
    not correct.
    An
    LRB
    must always
    be
    analyzed
    with
    each
    batch
    (as
    defined
    at
    Sec:t.
    9.6)
    of
    20
    samples.
    This
    Note amends
    Sect.
    9.5
    by
    deleting
    the
    erroneous
    second
    sentence.
    Section
    9.5
    is
    superseded
    in
    its
    entirety
    as
    follows
    “LABORATORY
    REAGENT
    BLANKS
    (LRB)
    --
    With
    each
    batch
    of
    samples
    processed.
    as
    a
    group
    within
    awork
    shift,
    analyze
    a
    LRB to
    determine
    the
    background
    system
    contamination.”
    Section
    9.7
    FRB Analysis
    ——
    This
    step
    in
    Method
    524.2
    states
    that
    a
    “field
    reagent
    blank
    should
    be
    analyzed”
    with
    each set
    of samples.
    This
    may
    cause
    unnecessary
    work.
    A
    field
    reagent
    blank
    is
    collected
    as
    a
    precaution
    against
    false
    positive
    results
    that
    may occur
    if
    the sample
    is
    contaminated
    in
    the
    field.
    Thus,
    a
    field
    reagent
    blank
    analysis is
    only
    required
    when
    contamination
    is
    detected
    in the
    compliance
    sample.
    This Note
    clarifies
    when
    the
    samples
    must
    be
    analyzed
    by
    ameiding the
    first
    sentence
    in
    Sect.
    9.7.
    Section
    9.7
    is
    superseded
    in
    its
    entirety
    as
    follows:
    “If a
    water
    sample
    is
    contaminated
    with
    an
    analyte,
    verify
    that
    it
    is
    not
    a
    sampling
    error
    by
    analyzing
    a
    field
    reagent
    blank.
    The
    results
    of
    these
    analyses
    will
    help
    define
    contamination
    resulting
    from
    field
    sampling,
    storage
    and transportation
    activities.
    If
    the
    field
    reagent
    blank
    shows
    unacceptable
    contamination,
    the
    analyst
    should
    identify
    and
    eliminate
    the
    contamination.”
    Tech.
    Notes
    on DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    41
    Mandatory
    Nethod
    Modifications

    Sctior
    10,
    Calibration
    ——
    There
    can
    be
    a
    conflict
    between
    the
    instructions
    in
    Sect.
    9.6
    in
    Method
    524.2,
    which
    define
    a
    batch
    as 20
    samples,
    and
    Sect.
    10.1,
    which
    requires
    calibration
    every
    8
    hours.
    Since
    a
    typical
    chromatographic
    run
    exceeds
    35
    minutes,
    20
    samples
    are
    measured
    in
    about
    11,
    not
    8,
    hours.
    This
    Note
    removes
    the
    potential
    conflict
    by
    explaining
    when
    calibration
    must
    be
    checked.
    Section
    10.1
    is
    superseded
    in
    its
    entirety
    as
    follows:
    “Demonstration
    and
    documentation
    of
    acceptable
    initial
    calibration
    is
    required
    before
    any
    samples
    are
    analyzed.
    In
    addition,
    acceptable
    performance
    must
    be
    confirmed
    intermittently
    throughout
    analysis
    of
    samples
    by
    performing
    continuing
    calibration
    checks.
    These
    checks
    are
    required
    at.the
    beginning
    of
    each
    work
    shift,
    but
    no
    less
    than
    every
    12
    hours.
    Additional
    periodic
    calibration
    checks
    are
    good
    laboratory
    practice.
    Since
    this
    method
    uses
    procedural
    standards,
    the
    analysis
    of
    the
    laboratory
    fortified
    blank,
    which
    is
    required
    in
    Sect.
    9.6,
    may
    be
    used
    here
    as
    the
    calibration
    check
    sample.”
    Tech.Notes
    on
    OW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    IV
    42
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    Performance
    Data
    for
    cis—and---trans
    1,3—dichioropropene
    Tech.
    Notes
    on DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    — Section
    IV
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications
    ,
    EPA
    omitted
    performance
    data
    for
    two
    unregulated
    VOCs,
    cis—
    1,3—dichioropropene
    and
    trans—1,3—dichloropropene.
    The
    following
    table
    replaces
    Table
    7
    in Method 524.2,
    Rev.
    4.0.
    TABLE
    7.
    ACCURACY AND
    PRECISION
    DATA
    FROM
    SEVEN
    DETERMINATIONS
    OF METHOD
    ANALYTES
    IN
    REAGENT
    WATER
    USING
    WIDE
    BORE
    CAPILLARY
    COLUMN
    NUMBER
    4
    .
    Mean
    Rel.
    Method
    True
    Conc.
    Std.
    Detect.
    Conc.
    Detected
    Dev.
    Limit
    Compound
    (pg/L)
    (ug/L)
    (%)
    (J.LgIL)
    Acetone
    1.0
    1.6
    5.7
    :
    0.28
    Acrylonitrile
    1.0
    0.81
    8.7
    0.22
    Allyl
    chloride
    1.0
    0.90
    4.7
    0.13
    2—Butanone
    2.0
    2.7
    5.6
    0.48
    Carbon
    disulfide
    0.20
    0.19
    15
    0.093
    Chloroacetonitrile
    1.0
    0.83
    4.7
    0.12
    1—Chiorobutane
    1.0
    0.87
    6.6
    0.18
    t—Dichloro—2—butene
    1.0
    1.3
    8.7
    0.36
    1,1—Dichioropropanone
    5.0
    4.2
    7.7
    1.0
    c—1,3—Dichloropropene
    0.20
    0.20
    3.1
    0.020
    t—1,3—Dichloropropene
    0.10
    0.11
    14
    0.048
    Diethyl ether
    1.0
    0.92
    9.5
    0.28
    Ethyl
    niethacrylate
    0.20
    0.23
    3.9
    :
    0.028
    Hexachloroethane
    0.20
    0.18
    10
    0.057
    2—Hexanone
    ..
    1.0
    1.1
    12
    0.39
    Methacrylonitrile
    1.0
    0.92
    4.2
    0.12
    Methylacrylate
    1.0
    1.2
    12
    0.45
    Methyl
    iodide
    0.20
    0.19
    3.1
    0.019
    Methylmethacrylate
    1.0
    1.0
    13
    0.43
    4—Methyl—2—pentanone
    0.40
    0.56
    9.7
    0.17
    Methyl—tert—butylether
    0.40
    0.52
    5.6
    0.090
    Nitrobenzene
    2.0
    2.1
    18
    1.2
    2—Nitropropane
    1.0
    0.83
    6.2
    0.16
    Pentachloroethane
    0.20
    0.23
    20
    0.14
    Propionitrile
    1.0
    0.87
    5.3
    0.14
    Tetrahydrofuran
    5.0
    3.9
    13
    1.6
    43

    EPA
    METHOD
    531.1
    (R16)
    AND
    SM 6610
    (RB),
    STORAGE
    OF
    SAMPLES
    This
    Technical
    Note removes
    the requirement
    in
    Methods
    531.1,
    Rev.
    3.0
    (R16) and
    SM 6610
    (RB)
    to
    freeze the
    samples.
    Sect.
    8.2.4
    of
    Method
    531.1
    requires
    buffered
    samples
    to
    be stored
    at
    minus 10°C.
    EPA
    realizes
    that
    this
    is impractical
    and unnecessary.
    After
    reviewing
    time
    storage data,
    EPA
    concluded
    that
    samples
    buffered
    to a pH
    of 3
    or less
    may
    be
    stored
    at 4°C.
    -
    The
    data supporting
    this conclusion
    is contained
    in
    Table 6610:11
    of
    SM
    6610.
    To
    reflect
    this change
    this
    Note
    supersedes
    Sect.
    8.2.4
    of
    EPA Method
    531.1 in
    its
    entirety
    as follows.
    Users of
    the
    Standard
    Method
    should
    make
    appropriate
    changes
    to the
    procedures,
    which are
    described
    in
    Paragraph
    2
    (Sampling
    and
    Storage)
    of SM
    6610.
    “Samples
    must
    be iced
    or refrigerated
    at
    4°C from
    tie
    of collection
    until
    analysis
    is
    begun.
    Although,
    preservation
    study
    results
    of
    up
    to
    28
    days indicate
    method
    analytes
    are
    not
    labile
    in
    water
    samples
    when
    sample pH
    is adjusted
    to
    3 or less,
    and samples
    are
    shipped
    and stored
    at
    4°C, analyte
    lability
    may
    be
    affected
    by
    the matrix.
    Therefore,
    the
    analyst must
    verify
    that the
    preservation
    technique
    is. applicable
    to the
    samples
    under
    study.”
    Tech. Notes
    on
    DW Methods
    October 1994
    Section
    IV
    44
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    METHOD
    551
    (R15),
    PENTANE
    This
    Technical
    Note
    allows
    optional
    use of
    pentane
    as the
    extraction
    solvent
    for
    some of
    the
    analytes
    in
    EPA Method
    551
    (R15).
    Since
    a
    change
    in
    the extraction solvent
    in
    any
    method
    is
    a
    change
    in
    the
    chemistry
    of the
    method,
    an
    alternative
    solvent
    must
    be validated
    and
    approved
    by
    EPA
    for
    each
    method
    analyte. EPA
    has
    approved
    only
    methyl
    t—butyl
    ether
    (FITBE)
    and pentane
    for
    use as
    extraction
    solvents
    in
    Method
    55]..
    Pentane
    may not
    be
    used
    to
    extract
    chioral
    hydrate;
    MTBE
    is
    approved
    for
    all
    Method
    551
    analytes.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    — Section
    IV
    45
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    EPA
    METHOD
    549.1
    (R3),
    SAMPLE
    CONTAINERS
    This
    Technical Note
    clarifies:
    that
    the
    amber
    sample
    bottle
    specified
    in
    Section
    6
    (Equipment and
    Supplies)
    of
    Method
    549.1,
    Rev.
    1.0
    (R3), can
    be
    made
    of
    any
    type
    of
    plastic.
    The
    bottle
    does
    not
    have
    to
    be
    PVC
    as
    stated
    in
    the
    method.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    — Section
    IV
    46
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    ALTERNATIVE
    LIQUID—SOLID
    EXTRACTION
    CARTRIDGES
    AND
    DISKS
    This
    Technical
    Note
    provides
    criteria
    for
    judging
    the
    equivalency
    of
    liquid—solid.extraction
    (LSE) cartridges
    and
    disks
    for
    use
    in methods
    that
    allow
    use
    of
    LSE
    technology.
    This
    Note
    supersedes
    the
    phrase
    “or
    equivalent”
    that
    is
    used
    in
    some
    methods to
    describe
    selection
    of
    alternative
    LSE
    cartridges
    or
    disks.
    Although
    EPA
    welcomes
    innovative
    LSE
    technology,
    EPA
    will
    not
    approve technology
    that
    compromises
    the
    reliability
    of
    the
    analysis.
    Liquid—solid
    extraction
    is
    performed
    using
    various
    sdrbents
    that
    are
    either
    packed
    into
    a
    cartridge or
    enmeshed
    in
    a
    disk
    of
    inert
    support
    material. EPA
    methods describe
    the
    cartridge
    or
    disk
    that
    was
    used
    to
    develop
    the
    LS.E
    procedure,
    and
    to produce
    the
    data
    which
    is published
    in
    the
    method.
    If
    a
    product
    is
    mentioned
    in
    the
    methods,
    it
    is
    for
    information
    purposes
    only.
    EPA
    believes various
    LSE
    cartridges
    and
    disks
    may
    be
    used,
    provided
    they
    meet
    all
    quality control requirements
    of
    the
    method,
    and
    provided
    they
    contain
    a
    sorbent
    that
    uses
    the
    same
    physicochemical
    principles
    as
    the
    cartridge
    or
    disk
    that
    is
    described
    in
    the
    approved
    LSE
    method.
    To
    denionstrate
    that
    alternative
    LSE
    cartridges
    and
    disks
    meet
    all
    quality
    control
    criteria, the
    analyst
    must
    be
    aware
    of the
    chemistry
    of
    the
    method.
    For
    example,
    in
    evaluating
    Method 552.1
    the
    recovery
    of
    the
    free
    acid
    (not
    a
    chemical
    derivative)
    from
    the
    water
    sample
    must
    be
    tested
    with
    the
    alternative
    LSE
    cartridge
    or
    disk.
    In
    judging
    LSE
    disk
    media,
    both
    the
    sorbent
    and
    the
    support
    must
    be
    evaluated.
    In
    the
    case
    of
    sorbents,
    similarities
    in
    polarity
    are
    not
    sufficient.
    For
    example,
    a
    C
    18
    —Silica
    sorbent
    may
    not
    perform
    the
    same
    as
    a
    ,
    styrene
    divinylbenzene copolymer
    sorbent.
    Thus,
    these
    sorbents
    would
    not
    be
    considered to
    be
    equivalent.
    In
    judging
    supports,
    any
    physical
    support
    used
    to
    hold
    the
    sorbent
    is
    acceptable
    provided
    the
    support
    is
    inert
    and
    compatible
    with
    the
    solutions
    or
    solvents
    required
    in
    the
    conditioning
    and
    elution
    steps
    of
    the
    method. However,
    any
    sorbent
    conditioning
    or
    elution
    steps,
    which
    are
    specified
    in
    the
    method
    must
    not
    be
    modified
    or
    eliminated
    to
    accommodate
    the
    support
    material.
    For
    example,
    Method
    552.1
    was
    developed
    and
    validated
    with
    ion
    exchange cartridges
    to
    determine
    dalapon
    and
    haloacetic
    acids.
    To
    efficiently
    extract
    the
    acids, the
    ion
    exchange
    resin
    must
    be activated
    with
    a
    sodium
    hydroxide
    rinse.
    In
    judging
    the
    equivalency
    of
    an
    alternative
    disk
    EPA
    would
    still
    require the
    rinse,
    because
    EPA
    has
    no
    data
    to
    support
    making
    the
    rinse
    optional.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    — Section
    IV
    47
    Mandatory
    Method
    Modifications

    SECTION
    V.
    RECOMMENDED
    METHOD
    MODIFICATIONS
    This
    section
    contains
    several
    optional
    procedures
    and
    recommended
    modifications
    to
    compliance
    methods.
    Each
    optional
    or
    recommended
    procedure
    is
    on
    a
    separate
    page
    to allow
    users
    to
    remove
    it,
    and
    place
    it
    with
    the
    applicable method(s). The
    parenthetical
    number
    (R),
    which
    appears
    adjacent
    to
    method
    citations in this
    section,
    refers
    to
    the
    publication
    in
    Section
    VI
    (References) that
    contains
    the
    referenced
    method.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    V
    48
    Recommended
    Method
    Modifications

    METHOD
    100.1
    (RiB),
    ASBESTOS
    GUIDANCE
    This
    Technical
    Note
    does
    not
    change
    Method
    100.1
    (R18).
    It
    describes
    how
    to
    make
    some
    steps
    in
    the method
    specifically
    applicable
    to
    the
    drinking
    water
    standard
    of
    asbestos
    fibers
    greater
    than
    10
    pm in
    length.
    This
    guidance
    is
    needed
    because
    the
    asbestos
    method
    was
    not
    designed
    specifically
    for
    measuring
    fibers
    greater
    than
    10 pm
    in
    length,
    and
    because
    laboratories
    may
    not
    wish
    to
    use
    an
    ozone/UV
    generator
    to
    prepare
    the
    samplefor
    analysis.
    EPA
    METHOD
    100.1
    DETERMINATION OF ASBESTOS
    FIBERS
    IN WATER
    OGWDW
    GUIDANCE
    AND
    CLARIFICATION
    FOR DRINKING
    WATER
    1.
    Approximately 800
    mL
    of sample
    should
    be
    taken
    in
    1—L
    bottles.
    Glass
    sampling
    bottles
    are
    preferable
    to
    plastic.
    If
    plastic
    bottles
    are
    used,
    polyethyleneis
    better
    than
    polypropylene.
    Do
    not
    use
    acid
    or
    mercuric
    chloride
    as
    preservatives.
    •Before
    collecting
    the
    sample,
    the
    water
    must
    be
    allowed
    to
    run until
    the
    temperature
    has
    stabilized,
    indicating
    that
    the
    water
    is
    representative
    of the
    main
    water
    line.
    Samples
    must
    be taken
    in duplicate.
    Store
    samples
    in the
    dark
    at
    4°C.
    2.
    To
    avoid
    use
    of the
    ozone,
    ultraviolet
    (UV) generator,
    samples
    must
    be filtered
    on the
    ‘polycarbonate
    (PC)
    filter
    in
    the
    laboratory
    within
    48
    hours
    of
    collection.
    If
    the
    holding
    time
    is
    exceeded,
    the
    sample
    must
    be
    treated
    to break
    down
    microbiological
    contaminants.
    This
    is
    done
    immediately
    prior
    to
    filtration
    by treating
    the
    sample
    in the
    original
    container
    with
    ozone,
    UV—light,
    and
    resonicating
    it
    to
    disperse
    the
    fibers.
    3.
    Up
    to
    5 samples
    may
    be
    composited.
    Sample
    compositing
    must
    be done
    in
    the
    laboratory
    on
    samples
    which
    are less
    than
    48—hours—old
    or
    have
    been
    individually
    ozone/UV
    treated
    in
    their
    original
    sample
    containers. Samples’must
    be
    sonicated
    and
    equal
    amounts
    withdrawn
    to
    make
    up
    the
    composite.
    It may
    also
    be
    prudent
    to
    filter
    an
    aliquot
    of
    each
    individual
    sample
    for
    analysis
    in.
    case the
    composite
    sample
    exceeds
    1/5
    of the
    MCL
    (1.4
    NFL
    >10 jim
    long).
    If
    this
    is
    not
    done,
    the original samples
    can
    only
    be
    filtered
    if
    they
    are less
    than 48—hours—old
    and have
    been
    resonicated
    or
    have
    been
    retreated
    with
    ozone—UV
    and resonicated.
    4.
    Only
    0.1 jim
    pore
    size
    PC filter
    membranes
    may
    be
    used.
    Filters
    must
    be
    taken
    from
    a lot
    which
    has been
    prescreened
    for background
    contamination.
    This
    is
    particularly
    important
    if
    fibers
    less
    than
    10
    jim
    are to
    be
    counted
    because
    PC
    filters
    may
    be
    contaminated
    with
    asbestos
    fibers
    shorter
    than
    10 pm.
    The
    PC
    filter’
    must
    be
    backed
    by
    a
    methyl
    cellulose
    ester
    (MCE)
    filter
    to diffuse
    the
    vacuum
    across
    the
    membrane.
    Use
    5
    jim
    pore
    size
    MCE
    membrane
    as the
    backing
    filter.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW Methods
    October
    1994
    — Section
    V
    49
    Recommended
    Method
    Modifications

    5.
    A
    filtration
    apparatus
    with
    straight
    vertical
    sides
    is
    preferred
    to
    one with
    tapered
    sides
    to
    avoid
    loss
    of
    fibers
    settling
    on
    tapered
    sides
    of
    the
    funnel.
    6.
    States
    agencies
    may choose
    to
    require
    the
    counting
    offibers
    •less
    than
    10
    pm long
    to
    help
    judge
    the
    condition
    of
    asbestos/cement
    pipes.
    Certification
    lists
    must
    identify
    whether
    labs
    count
    all
    fibers
    or
    only
    those
    over
    10
    pm,
    and whether
    the
    lab
    is
    certified
    by
    a
    state
    or
    EPA
    region.
    7.
    A
    calibrated
    magnification
    of
    at
    least
    10,000X
    ±%
    is
    adequate
    for
    counting
    fibers
    over
    10
    pm in
    length.
    A
    minimum
    spot
    size
    of
    250
    nm
    or
    smaller
    is
    required
    for
    this
    analysis.
    8.
    For compliance
    analysis
    of
    asbestos
    in
    drinking
    water
    samples,
    an
    analytical
    sensitivity
    200,000
    fibers
    per
    liter
    (0.2MFL)
    is
    required,
    subject
    to
    the
    following
    stopping
    rules:
    a.
    Analysis
    may
    be
    terminated
    at
    the
    completion
    of
    the
    grid
    opening
    during
    examination
    of
    which
    an
    analytical
    sensitivity
    of
    0.2MFL
    is
    achieved,
    or
    at
    the
    completion
    of
    the
    grid
    opening
    which
    contains
    the
    100
    th
    asbestos
    fiber
    over10
    urn
    in
    length,
    whichever-occurs
    first.
    b.
    A
    minimum
    of
    4
    grid
    openings
    must
    be
    counted,
    even
    if
    this
    results
    in
    counting
    more
    than
    100
    asbestos
    fibers
    over
    10
    pm
    in
    length.
    c.
    The
    grid
    openings
    examined
    must
    be
    drawn
    about
    equally
    from
    a
    minimum
    of
    3
    specimen
    grids.
    9.
    Counting
    rules:
    a.
    Count
    fibers
    with
    an
    aspect
    ratio
    3:1.
    b.
    Count
    a
    fiber
    bundle
    as
    a
    single
    fiber
    with
    a
    width
    equal
    to
    an
    estimate
    of
    the
    mean
    bundle
    width,
    and
    lengt
    equal
    to
    the
    maximum
    length.
    c.
    Count
    individual
    asbestos
    fibers
    and
    bundles
    within
    clusters
    and
    matrices,
    as long
    as
    they
    meet
    the
    definitions
    of
    fibers
    and bundles
    as
    described
    in 9A
    and
    9B.
    d.
    Count
    the
    fibers
    which
    intersect
    the
    top
    andleft
    sides
    of
    the
    grid
    opening
    and
    record
    as
    twice
    their
    visible
    length.
    Do
    not
    record
    fibers
    intersecting
    the
    bottom
    and
    right
    sides
    of
    the
    grid
    opening.
    e.
    Count
    only
    one
    end
    of
    the
    fiber
    to
    avoid
    possibly
    counting
    a
    fiber
    more
    than
    once.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    V
    50
    Recommended
    Method
    Modifications

    10.
    Fiber
    identification
    criteria:
    a.
    Each
    fiber
    suspected
    to
    be
    chrysotile
    must
    first
    be
    examined
    by
    electron
    diffraction
    following
    the
    procedure
    In
    Figure
    15
    of
    the
    EPA
    method.
    If
    the
    characteristic
    electron
    diffraction
    (ED)
    pattern
    is
    observed,
    the
    fiber
    shall
    be
    classified
    as
    CD
    (chrysotile
    identified
    by
    diffraction
    pattern).
    If
    no
    pattern
    is
    observed
    or
    the
    pattern
    is
    not
    distinctive,
    the
    fiber
    shall
    be
    examined
    by
    EDXA
    (energy
    dispersive
    x—ray
    analysis)
    and
    classified
    according
    to
    the
    EPA
    method.
    Onily
    chrysotile
    fibers
    classified
    as
    CD,
    CMQ
    (chrysotile
    identified
    by
    morphology
    and
    semi—quantitative
    EDXA)
    or
    CDQ
    (chrysotile
    identified
    by
    morphology,
    electron
    diffraction
    and
    semi—quantitative
    EDXA)
    shall
    be
    included
    in
    the
    calculation
    of
    the
    concentration
    for
    the
    purposes
    of
    this
    regulation.
    b.
    Each
    fiber
    suspected
    to
    be
    amphibole
    must
    first
    be
    examined
    by
    electron
    diffraction
    following
    the
    procedure
    in
    Figure
    18
    of
    the
    EPA
    Method.
    Each
    fiber
    must
    be
    examined
    by
    EDXA.
    -
    If
    a
    random
    orientation
    electron
    diffraction
    pattern
    showing
    a
    0.53
    nm
    layer
    spacing
    is
    obtained,
    and
    the
    elements
    and
    peak
    areas
    of
    the
    EDXA
    spectrum
    correspond
    to
    those
    of
    a
    known
    amphibole
    asbestos,
    the
    fiber
    shall
    classified
    as
    ADQ
    (amphibole
    identified
    by
    diffraction
    and
    semi—quantitative
    EDXA).
    If
    the
    random
    orientation
    electron
    diffraction
    pattern
    cannot
    be
    obtained,
    is
    incomplete,
    or
    is
    not
    recognizable
    as
    a
    non—
    amphibole
    pattern,
    but
    the
    elements
    and
    the
    peak
    areas
    of
    the
    EDXA
    spectrum
    correspond
    to
    those
    of
    a
    known
    amphibole
    asbestos,
    the
    fiber
    shallbe
    classified
    as
    AQ
    (amphibole
    identified
    by
    semi—quantitative
    EDXA).
    Only
    amphibole
    fibers
    classified
    as
    ADQ,
    AQ,
    AZQ
    (amphibole
    identified
    by
    zone
    axis
    electron
    diffraction
    and
    semiquantitative
    EDXA)
    and
    AZZQ
    (amphibole
    identified
    by
    2
    zone
    axes
    electron
    diffraction
    and
    semi—quantitative
    EDXA)
    shall
    be
    included
    in,
    the
    calculation
    of
    asbestos
    concentration.
    11.
    It
    is
    not
    necessary
    to
    calculate
    the
    mass
    concent’ation
    of
    asbestos
    for
    this
    regulation.
    Concentrations
    must
    be
    reported
    When
    no
    in
    MFL>1O
    pm.
    asbestos
    fibers
    greater
    than
    10
    pm
    are
    found,
    report
    MFL>1O
    pm.
    <0.2
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    V
    51
    Recommended
    Method
    Nodifications

    METHOD
    502.2
    (R16),
    USE
    OF
    THE
    PID
    This
    Technical
    Note
    clarifies
    when
    a
    photoionization
    detector
    (PID)
    not
    is
    required.
    Method
    502.2,
    Rev.
    2.0
    (R16).requires
    the
    use
    of
    a
    PID
    to
    measure
    volatile
    organic
    compounds
    (VOCs)
    that
    cannot
    be
    measured
    with
    an
    electrolytic
    conductivity
    detector.
    If
    only
    halogenated
    analytes,
    such
    as
    the
    trihalomethanes,
    are
    to
    be
    measured,
    a
    PID
    is
    not
    needed.
    This
    option
    will
    al-low
    laboratories
    to
    use
    this
    VOC method
    for
    determination
    of
    total
    trihalomethanes
    as
    specified
    at
    fl41.30
    without
    the
    expense
    of
    a
    P10.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    Dli
    Methods
    -
    October
    1994
    Section
    V
    52
    Recommended
    Method
    Modifications

    METHODS
    502.2
    (R16),
    524.2
    (R3) AND
    551
    (R15)
    SAMPLE
    DECHLORINATION
    This Technical
    Note
    provides
    guidance
    to help
    laboratories
    correctly
    dechlorinate
    samples
    for
    compliance
    with
    the
    total
    trihaloniiethane
    (TTHM)
    monitoring
    requirements
    under
    40
    CFR
    141.30
    using
    EPA
    Method
    502.2,
    Rev.
    2.0
    (R16)
    or 524.2,
    Rev. 4.0
    (R3)
    or 551
    (R15),
    or
    when
    VOCs
    and
    THMs
    are
    to
    be
    measured
    in
    the same
    sample.
    This
    guidance
    also
    applies
    to
    use
    of
    EPAMethods
    502.1,
    503.1
    and
    524.1
    (R16).
    These
    methods
    are
    not
    approved
    for
    THM
    analysis
    under
    40
    CFR
    141.30,
    but
    some
    laboratories
    may
    wish
    to
    use
    these
    methods
    for
    analysis
    of
    samples
    other
    than
    compliance
    samples.
    This guidance
    supersedes
    the
    discussion
    on
    ascorbic
    acid
    contained
    in
    the
    introduction
    (p.
    3)
    to
    the
    1991
    EPA
    manual
    (R16).
    The
    Agency
    believes
    revised
    guidance
    is
    warranted
    because
    laboratories
    may
    be
    confused
    bythe
    variety
    of
    preservation
    procedures
    described
    in
    the
    five
    methods.
    The
    reagent
    available
    to
    dechlorinate
    samples
    varies
    with
    the
    method
    used,
    or
    with
    the
    analyte
    to
    be
    measured.
    Laboratories
    must
    carefully
    follow
    the
    preservation
    procedure
    described
    in
    each method,
    especially
    the
    order
    in
    which
    reagents
    are
    added
    to
    the
    sample.
    Each
    method
    allows
    use
    of
    one
    or
    moredechlorination
    reagents
    depending
    on
    the
    analyte
    to
    be
    measured.
    These
    reagents
    remain
    available
    for
    use,
    but
    EPA
    strongly
    recommends
    use
    of
    sodium
    thiosulfate
    as
    the
    dechlorination
    reagent,
    because
    the
    Agency
    has
    more
    performance
    data
    demonstrating
    the
    effectiveness
    of
    this
    chemical
    than
    for
    other
    dechlorination
    reagents,.
    One exception
    vinyl
    chloride
    and
    sodium
    thiosulfate
    the
    analysis.
    EPA
    be
    acidified
    iinmedi
    as
    for analysis
    of
    551
    (R15).
    to
    this
    recommendation
    is
    ascorbic
    acid
    must
    be
    used
    when
    Qther
    gases
    are
    measured
    with
    a
    mass
    spectrometer,
    because
    in
    an
    acidified
    sample
    generates
    a
    gas
    that
    interferes
    with
    cautions
    that
    samples
    dechlorinated
    with
    ascorbic
    acid
    must
    ately,
    as
    directed
    in
    the
    method.
    Other
    exceptions,
    such
    haloacetonitriles
    are
    described
    in
    Section
    8
    of
    EPA
    Method
    Tech.
    Iotes
    on
    Dl’!
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    V
    53
    Recommended
    Method
    Modifications

    METHOD
    504.1
    (R5),
    CHROMATOGRAPHIC
    INTERFERENCES
    Although
    this
    Technical
    Note
    discusses
    misidentifications
    that
    may
    occur
    when
    measuring
    1,2—dibromoethane
    (EDB)
    or
    dibromochioropropane
    (DBCP)
    with
    Method
    504.1
    (R5),
    the
    guidance
    and
    warnings
    provided
    here
    are
    applicable
    to
    the
    interpretation
    of
    analytical
    results
    from
    any
    method.
    Volatile
    organic
    chemicals
    (VOCs)
    or
    trihalomethanes
    (THt1s)
    can
    cause
    chromatographic
    interference
    problems
    if
    these
    chemicals
    •are
    in
    the
    sample,
    and
    coelute
    on
    the
    column
    used
    to
    separate
    and
    identify
    EDB
    or
    DBCP.
    Interferences
    can
    lead
    to
    false
    positive
    results,
    if
    a
    coeluting
    VOC
    or
    THM
    is
    misidentified
    as
    EDB
    DBCP.
    or
    Since
    any
    method,
    even
    one
    that
    uses
    a
    selective
    detector,
    is
    subject
    to
    false
    positive
    results,
    any
    result
    that
    exceeds
    an
    actionconcentration
    must
    be
    rigorously
    Method
    504.1
    uses
    an
    electron
    capture
    detector
    that
    is
    very.
    sensitive
    and
    stable.
    Although
    this
    detector
    is
    exdellent
    at
    detecting
    very
    low
    cbncentrations
    of
    halogenated
    compounds,
    it
    is
    subject
    to
    many
    interferences.
    Sections
    4.3
    and
    6.6.2
    in
    Method
    504.1
    note
    that
    a
    common
    THM
    disin
    fection
    by—product
    in
    chlorinated
    water
    supplies,
    dibromoc:hloromethane,
    can
    elute
    close
    to
    EDB.
    This
    means
    in
    the
    initial
    demonstration
    of
    capability,
    a
    laboratory
    must
    determine
    the
    retention
    time
    of
    dibromochloromethäne
    or
    other
    compounds
    that
    might
    coelute
    with
    the
    method
    analytes.
    A
    relative
    response
    factor
    and
    retention
    time
    for
    each
    possible
    interfering
    anialyte
    should
    be
    determined.
    These
    retention
    times
    can
    be
    determined
    by
    using
    procedures
    in
    ,
    Method
    551
    to
    prepare
    and
    analyze
    THM
    and
    VOC
    standards
    for
    analysis
    on
    a
    Method
    504.1
    chromatographic
    column.
    This
    information
    can
    be
    obtained
    more
    easily
    if
    a
    DB—1
    column
    is
    used
    in
    Method
    504.1
    and
    the
    retention
    times
    are
    compared
    to
    the
    THM
    and
    VOC
    retention
    times
    obtained
    with
    the
    DB—1
    column
    used
    in
    Method
    551.
    Confirmation
    procedures
    must
    be
    followed
    before
    taking
    action
    on
    a
    result.
    Confirmation
    of
    potential
    Method
    504.1
    or
    Method
    551
    chromatographic
    interferences
    can
    be
    obtained
    with
    an
    inexpensive
    purge—and—trap
    analysis
    (EPA
    Method
    502.2
    (R16)
    or
    524.2
    (R3)).
    These
    methods
    can
    identify
    interfering
    trihalomethanes,
    or
    VOCs
    that
    might
    occur
    with
    EDB
    if
    the
    ‘source
    of
    EDB
    were
    unleaded
    gasoline
    (cf.
    Sect.
    2.3).
    Although
    Method
    524.2
    ‘is
    not
    as
    sensitive
    as
    Method
    504.1,
    EDB
    can
    be
    measured
    at
    concentrations
    greater
    than
    0.06
    pg/L.
    Other
    confirmation
    procedures,
    which
    are
    described
    in
    Method
    504.1,
    are:
    analysis
    on
    a
    second
    column
    with
    dissimilar
    retention
    times
    (Sect.
    6.6.2),
    and
    changing
    the
    temperature
    program
    to
    provide
    sufficient
    separation
    between
    EDB
    and
    dibromochioromethane
    (Sect.
    9.1.2).
    EPA
    emphasizes
    that
    knowledge
    of
    probable
    contaminants
    ‘in
    a
    sample,
    and
    of
    method
    interferences
    are
    key
    parts
    of
    quality
    assurance
    and
    good
    data
    interpretation
    when
    using
    ji
    analytical
    method.
    Laboratories
    reporting
    data
    must
    realize
    that
    interpreters
    of
    occurrence
    data
    are
    often
    unfamiliar
    with
    weaknesses
    in
    an
    analytical
    method,
    and
    that
    officials
    may
    enforce
    on
    the
    data
    as
    provided
    by
    the
    laboratory.
    EPA
    strongly
    encourages
    data
    reviewers
    to
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section.V
    54
    Recommended
    Method
    Modifications

    question
    the
    plausibility,
    not
    just
    the
    possibility,
    of
    a:
    result,
    and
    not
    assume
    that
    a
    laboratory
    has
    always
    eliminated
    analytical
    error.
    A
    skeptical
    approach
    is
    especially
    important
    when
    initial
    sample
    results
    are
    being
    interpreted.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    V
    55
    Recommended
    Method
    Modifications

    METHODS
    505,
    507,
    508
    (R16),
    INTERCHANGE
    OF
    DETECTORS
    This
    Technical
    Note
    clarifies
    under
    what
    conditions
    a
    laboratory
    may
    use
    either
    an
    electron—capture
    detector
    (ECD)
    or
    a
    nitrogen—phosphorous
    detector
    (NPD)
    in
    EPA
    Methods
    505,
    Rev.
    2.0;
    507,
    Rev.
    2.0;
    or
    508,
    Rev.
    3.0
    (R16).
    Laboratories
    may
    wish
    to
    use
    a
    different
    detector
    to
    decrease
    method
    detection
    limits.
    For
    example,
    use
    of
    an
    NPD
    in
    Method
    505
    can
    increase
    the
    sensitivity
    of
    the
    analysis
    for
    alachior,
    atrazine
    and
    simazine.
    Section
    6.8.3
    of
    Methods
    507
    and
    508
    and
    Sect.
    10.4
    of
    Methods
    505,
    507
    and
    508
    allow
    use
    of
    an
    LCD
    NPD
    or
    detector
    provided
    the
    initial
    demonstration
    of
    capability
    criteria
    are
    met.
    These
    criteria
    are
    specified
    in
    Section
    10
    of
    each
    method.
    Section
    6.8.3
    of
    Methods
    507
    and
    508
    note
    that
    a
    mass
    spectrometer
    might
    be
    used.
    This
    Note
    withdraws
    this
    recommendation,
    which
    was
    made
    before
    Method
    525.2
    was
    available.
    EPA
    no
    longer
    recommends
    use
    of
    a
    mass
    spectrometer
    with
    Methods
    507
    and
    508,
    because
    important
    tuning
    and
    calibration
    procedures
    for
    the
    mass
    spectrometer
    are
    not
    described
    in
    either
    method,
    and
    because
    Method
    525.2
    thoroughly
    describes
    these
    procedures.
    Method
    525.2
    is
    approved
    for
    determination
    of
    all
    Method
    507
    and
    508
    analytes,
    except
    PCBs
    as
    the
    seven
    Aroclors.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    OW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    V
    56
    Recommended
    Method
    Modifications

    EPA
    METHODS
    507,
    508,
    515.1
    (R16),
    MERCURIC
    CHLORIDE
    This
    Technical
    Note
    removes
    the
    requirement
    to
    use
    mercuric
    chloride,
    because
    concerns
    have
    been
    raised
    about
    the
    environmental
    hazards.
    and
    costs
    associated
    with
    disposal
    of
    mercuric
    compounds.
    Mercuric
    chloride
    is
    used
    as
    a
    biocide
    in EPA
    Methods
    507,
    Rev.
    2.0;
    508,
    Rev.
    3.0;
    and
    515.1,
    Rev.
    4.0
    (R16).
    Since
    drinking
    water
    usually
    exhibits
    limited
    biological
    activity,
    EPA
    is
    removing
    the
    requirement
    under
    Sect.
    8.2
    of
    Methods
    507,
    508,
    and
    515.1
    to
    use
    mercuric
    chloride
    as
    a
    bactericide.
    To
    minimize
    the
    possibility
    of
    occasional
    false—negative
    results,
    the
    Agency
    would
    still
    require
    the
    use
    of
    mercuric
    chloride
    in
    any
    drinking
    water
    sample
    that
    might
    be
    expected
    to
    exhibit
    biolog.ical
    degradation
    of
    a
    target
    pesticide.
    There
    are
    also
    environmental
    and
    economic
    concerns
    about
    addition,
    of
    acid
    to
    drinking
    water
    samples
    in
    the
    VOC
    methods
    (Methods
    502.2,
    524.2,
    arid
    551).
    However,
    EPA
    will
    not
    remove
    this
    requirement,
    because
    EPA
    has
    data
    that
    demonstrates
    microbiological
    -degradation
    of
    VOCs
    in
    drinking
    water
    samples.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    Section
    V
    57
    Recommended
    Method
    Modifications

    EPA METHOD
    1613,
    DIOXIN
    (R17)
    This Technical
    Note does
    not
    change
    Method
    1613
    (R17).
    It
    describes
    how
    to
    make some steps
    in
    the
    method
    specifically
    applicable
    to
    measurement
    of
    2,3,7,8—tetrachlorodibenzo—p—dioxin
    (TCDD).
    Guidance
    is
    needed
    because
    Method
    1613
    was
    written
    to
    determine
    many
    isomers
    of
    dioxins
    and
    furans,
    but
    under
    the
    Safe
    Drinking
    Water Act,
    EPA
    only
    regulates
    the
    2,3,7,8—TCDD
    isomer.
    Also,
    information
    to
    determine
    if
    the
    drinking
    water
    sample
    needs
    to
    be
    filtered
    is
    not
    clearly
    provided
    in
    Method
    1613.
    Using
    this
    guidance
    will
    substantially
    decrease
    the cost
    of
    Method
    1613,
    because
    it
    eliminates
    many
    costly
    steps that
    are
    not required
    when
    only
    TCDD
    is
    to
    be
    determined.
    EPA
    METHOD
    1613
    OGWDW
    GUIDANCE
    AND
    CLARIFICATION
    FOR
    ANALYSIS
    OF
    2,3,7,8—TETRACHLORODIBENZO—p—DIOXIN
    (TCDD)
    IN
    DRINKING
    WATER
    1.
    The
    only isotopically
    labeled
    compounds
    which
    are
    necessary
    for
    calibration
    and
    quantitation
    in
    addition
    to
    the
    native
    2,3,7,8—TCDD
    are
    13
    C
    12
    2,3,7,8—TCDD
    the spiking
    compound),
    37
    C1
    4
    2,3,7,8—TCDD
    (the
    clean
    up
    standard),
    and
    3
    C,
    2
    1,2,3,4—TCDD
    (the
    internal
    standard).
    2.
    During
    calibration,
    selected
    ion
    current
    profiles
    of
    only the
    compounds
    in
    item
    1
    above
    need
    be
    obtained
    according
    to
    directions
    in
    Sect.
    7
    of
    the method
    by
    monitoring
    the
    exact masses
    specified
    for
    these
    compounds
    in
    Table
    3
    of
    the
    method
    at
    >10,000
    resolving
    power..
    The
    relative
    abundances
    must met
    the
    criteria
    specified
    in
    the
    method.
    There
    must
    be
    at
    least
    baseline
    resolution
    in
    the
    chromatogram
    between
    the
    1,2,3,4—
    TCDD
    and
    the 2,3,7,8—TCDD
    isomers.
    3.
    If
    the sample
    is
    colorless,
    odorless,
    has
    a
    turbidity
    of
    one
    (1)
    NTU
    or
    .less
    and
    consists
    of
    a
    single
    phase,
    filtration
    is
    not
    required,
    and
    the
    sample
    may be
    analyzed
    according
    to
    Sect.
    11.1
    of
    the
    method.
    Turbidity
    must be
    measured
    with
    an
    approved
    method.
    Any
    sample
    containing
    multiple
    phases,
    or
    having
    a
    turbidity
    .of
    more
    than
    one
    (>1)
    NTU
    must
    be
    filtered.
    The
    filter
    particulate
    must
    be
    analyzed
    according
    to
    Sect.
    11.2
    of
    the
    method.
    4.
    Since drinking
    water
    samples
    are
    relatively
    free
    frOm
    interferences,
    the
    optional
    clean—up
    steps
    described
    in
    the
    method
    probably
    will
    not
    be
    needed
    for
    most samples.
    Tech.
    Notes
    on
    DW
    Methods
    October
    1994
    —.
    Section
    V
    58
    Recommended
    . Method
    Modifications

    SECTION
    VI.
    EPA
    CONTACTS
    AND
    METHOD
    REFERENCES
    OBTAINING
    METHODS AND
    TECHNICAL
    ASSISTANCE
    For
    assistance
    in
    obtaining
    copies
    of
    EPA
    methods,
    ‘Dr
    for
    answers
    to
    technical questions
    about
    drinking
    water
    methods
    please
    contact:
    U.S.
    EPA,
    Environmental Monitoring
    Systems
    Laboratory
    Chemistry
    Research
    Division
    (MC
    564)
    Cincinnati,
    OH
    45268—0001
    Telephone:
    513
    569—7586
    CERTIFICATION
    AND
    REGULATORY
    ASSISTANCE
    For
    answers
    to
    questions
    about
    laboratory
    certificahion,
    the
    Labcert
    Bulletin,
    and
    the
    regulatory status
    of
    drinking
    water
    methods
    please
    contact:
    U.S.
    EPA,
    Technical Support
    Division
    Drinking
    Water
    Quality Assessment
    Branch
    (MC
    140)
    ATTN:
    Methods
    and
    Laboratory
    Certification
    Cincinnati, OH
    45268—0001
    Telephone:
    513
    569—7938
    REFERENCES
    Ri.
    Approved
    EPA
    Methods
    200.7,
    200.8,
    200.9,
    and
    245.1
    are
    contained
    in
    “Methods
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Metals
    in
    Environmental
    Samples
    Supplement
    I,”
    May
    1994,
    NTIS
    PB94—184942.
    R2.
    EPA
    Method
    100.2,
    “Determination
    of
    Asbestos
    Structures
    over
    10pm
    in
    Length
    in
    Drinking
    Water,”
    June
    1994,
    NTIS
    PB94—201902.
    R3.
    Approved
    EPA
    Methods
    515.2,
    524.2,
    548.1,
    549.1,
    552,1
    and
    555
    are
    contained
    in
    “Methods
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Organic
    Compounds
    in
    Drinking Water
    — Supplement
    II,”
    August 1992,
    NTIS
    PB92—207703.
    R4.
    Approved
    EPA
    Methods 180.1,
    300.0,
    335.4,
    353.2
    and
    ‘ecommended
    Method
    375.2
    are
    contained
    in
    “Methods
    for
    the Determination
    of
    Inorganic
    Substances
    in
    Environmental
    Samples,”
    August
    1993,
    NTIS
    PB94—121811.
    R5.
    EPA
    Method
    504.1,
    “1,2—Dibromoetháne
    (EDB),
    1,2—Dibromo--3—chloropropane
    (DBCP),
    and
    1,2,3—Trichloropropane
    (123TCP)
    in
    Water
    by
    Microextraction
    and
    Gas
    Chromatography,”
    1993.
    R6.
    EPA
    Method
    508.1, Rev.
    1.0,
    “Determination
    of
    Chlorinated
    Pesticides,
    Herbicides, nd
    Organohalides
    by
    Liquid—Solid
    Extraction
    ad
    Electron
    Capture
    Gas
    Chromatography,”
    1994.
    R7.
    EPA
    Method
    525.2,
    Rev.
    1.0,
    “Determination
    of
    Organlé
    Compounds
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    by
    Liquid—Solid
    Extraction
    and
    Capillary
    Column
    Gas
    Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry,”
    March
    1994.
    59

    R8.
    Method
    6610 “Carbamate
    Pesticides”
    is
    contained
    in
    Standard
    Methods
    for
    the
    Examination
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastewater
    18th
    Edition
    Supplement,
    1994
    may
    be
    purchased
    from
    the
    American
    Public
    Health
    Association,
    1015
    Fifteenth
    Street
    NW,
    Washington,
    D.C.
    20005.
    R9.
    GLI
    Method
    2,
    “Turbidity”
    is
    available
    free
    from
    Great
    Lakes
    Instruments,
    Inc.,
    November
    2,
    1992.
    Rio.
    Orion
    Technical
    Bulletin
    601
    “Standard
    Method
    of
    Test
    for
    Nitrate
    in
    Drinking
    Water,”
    July
    1994
    is
    identical
    to
    Orion
    WeWWG/5880,
    which
    had
    previously
    been
    approved
    for
    nitrate
    analysis
    at
    40
    CFR
    141.23(k)(1).
    ATI
    Orion
    republished
    this
    method
    in
    1994,
    and
    renumbered
    it
    as
    601,
    because
    the
    1985
    manual
    “Orion
    Guide
    to
    Water
    and
    Wastewater
    Analysis:,”
    which contained
    WeWWG/5880,
    is
    no
    longer
    available.
    Technical
    Bulletin
    601
    is
    available
    free
    from
    ATI
    Orion,
    529
    Main
    Street,
    Boston,
    MA
    02129.
    Laboratories
    wishing
    to
    use
    the
    Orion
    method
    should
    be
    aware
    that
    SM
    4500—NO
    3
    —D,
    which
    is
    published
    in
    the
    18th
    edition
    of
    Standard
    Methods
    for
    the
    Examination
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,
    is
    equivalent
    to
    Orion
    60.1.
    Ru.
    The
    American
    Society
    for
    Testing
    and
    Materials
    (ASTM)
    annually
    reprints
    all
    of
    the
    methods
    contained
    in
    the
    Annual
    Book
    of
    ASTM
    Methods,
    Vols.
    11.01
    and
    11.02,
    including
    methods
    that
    have
    not
    been
    editorially
    or
    technically
    revised.
    Thus,
    it
    is
    permissible
    to
    use
    any
    edition
    that
    contains
    the
    EPA—approved
    version
    of
    the
    method
    that
    is
    approved.
    The
    Annual Book
    of
    ASTM
    Methods
    may
    be
    purchased
    from
    ASTM,
    1916
    Race
    Street,
    Philadelphia,
    PA
    19103.
    R12.
    Eighteenth
    edition
    of
    Standard
    Methods
    for
    the
    Examination
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,
    1992
    may
    be
    purchased
    from
    the
    American
    Public
    Health
    Association,
    1015
    Fifteenth
    Street
    NW,
    Washington,
    D.C.
    20005.
    R13.
    EPA
    Method
    245.2,
    “Mercury,
    Automated
    Cold
    Vapor
    Technique,”
    Environmental
    Monitoring
    Systems
    Laboratory,
    Cincinnati,
    OH
    45268,
    1974.
    Also
    contained
    in
    reference
    14.
    R14.
    “Methods
    for
    Chemical
    Analysis
    of
    Water
    and
    Wastes,”
    EPA,
    March
    1983,
    NTIS PB84—128677.
    R15.
    Approved
    EPA
    Methods
    506,
    547,
    550,
    550.1
    and
    551
    are
    contained
    in
    “Methods
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Organic
    Compounds,
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    ——
    Supplement
    I,”
    July
    1990,
    NTIS
    PB91-146027.
    R16.
    Approved
    EPA
    Methods
    502.2, 505,
    507,
    508,
    508A,
    515.1
    and
    531.1,
    and
    Methods
    502.1,
    503.1,
    and
    524.1,
    which
    will
    be
    withdrawn
    are
    contained
    in
    “Methods
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Organic
    Compounds
    in
    Drinking
    Water”
    December
    1988,
    Revised
    July
    1991,
    NTIS
    PB91—231480.
    R17.
    EPA
    Method
    1613,
    Revision
    B,
    “Tetra—through—Octa—
    Chlorinated
    Dioxins
    and
    Furans
    by
    Isotope—Dilution
    HRGC/HRMS,”
    October
    1994,
    NTIS
    PB95—104774.
    60

    R18.
    EPA Method 100.1,
    “Analytical
    Method
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Asbestos
    Fibers
    in
    Water,”
    September
    1983,
    NTIS
    PB83—260471.
    R19.
    Methods
    1—3300—85,
    1—1030—85,
    1—1601—85,
    1—2598—85,
    1—1700—85
    and
    1—2700—
    85
    in
    Techniques
    of
    Water
    Resources
    Investigations
    of
    the
    U.S.
    Geological
    Survey,
    Book
    5,
    Chapter
    A—i,
    3rd
    ed.,
    U.S.
    Geological
    Survey,
    Books
    and
    Open
    File Reports
    Section,
    Box
    25425,
    Federal
    Center,
    Denver,
    CO
    80225—
    0425, 1989.
    R20.
    “Waters
    Test Method
    for
    Determination
    of
    Nitrite/Nitrate
    in
    Water
    Using
    Single
    Column
    Ion Chromatography,”
    Method
    8—1011
    is
    available
    free
    from
    Millipore
    Corporation,
    Waters
    Chromatography
    Division,
    34
    Maple
    Street,
    Milford,
    MA
    01757.
    R21.
    Industrial
    Method
    No.
    129—71W,
    “Fluoride
    in
    Water
    arid
    Wastewater,”
    December
    1972, and
    Method
    No.
    380—75WE,
    “Fluoride
    in
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,”
    February
    1976
    are
    available
    free
    from
    Technicon
    Industrial
    Systems,
    Tarrytown,
    NY 10591.
    V
    R22.
    Method
    1—2601—90
    in
    Methods
    of
    Analysis
    by
    the
    U.S.
    Geological
    Survey
    National
    Water
    Quality
    Laboratory——Determination
    of
    Inorganic
    and
    Organic
    Constituents
    in
    Water
    and
    Fluvial
    Sediments,
    Open
    File
    Report
    93—125
    is
    available
    from
    U.S.
    Geological
    Survey,
    Books
    and
    Open
    File
    Reports
    Section,
    Box 25425,
    Federal
    Center,
    Denver,
    CO
    80225—0425,
    1993.
    References
    Ri
    to
    R4
    are
    available
    for
    a fee
    through
    :the
    National
    Technical
    Information
    Service
    (NTIS),
    which
    is
    located
    at
    U.S.
    Department
    of
    Commerce,
    5285
    Port
    Royal
    Road,
    Springfield,
    Virginia
    22161;
    the
    toll—free
    number
    is
    (800)—553—6847.
    Until
    references
    R5
    to
    Ri
    are
    published
    in
    “Methods
    for
    the
    Determination
    of
    Organic
    Compounds
    in
    Drinking
    Water
    Supplement
    III,”
    these
    methods
    are available
    free
    from
    EPA—EMSL—Cincinnati,
    Cincinnati,
    OH
    45268.
    The
    phone
    number
    is
    (513)
    569—7586.
    The
    “Supplement
    III”
    manual
    is
    expected
    to
    be
    published
    by
    EMSL—Cincinnati
    in
    late
    1995.
    61
    a.$,
    GOVVNNT
    PRINTING
    OPPICE;
    1995—65O—OOj/OO22o

    /41i.;L.
    /11/
    This
    ASTM D6508,
    Rev2 method
    document
    has
    been
    reviewed by EPA Office
    of Drinking
    Water
    and
    Wastewater for EPA
    Tier
    3
    approval. Added updated
    QC
    criteria based
    upon
    statistical
    analysis
    by Dyncorp.
    ATP Case
    #:
    N00-0002
    and D00-0002
    Draft
    #:
    Second
    draft with
    EPA
    Modifications: ASTM D6508, Rev 2
    Date:
    December 2000
    Method Author:
    Jim
    Krol
    Telephone:
    508/482-2131
    FAX:
    508/482-3625
    Test
    Method
    for
    Determination
    of
    Dissolved
    Inorganic
    Anions
    in Aqueous
    Matrices
    Using
    Capillary Ion
    Electrophoresis
    and Chromate
    Electrolyte
    V
    1 Scope
    1.1 This
    test method covers the determination
    of
    the
    inorganic anions fluoride,
    bromide,
    chloride, nitrite, nitrate,
    ortho-phosphate, and sulfate in drinking
    water,
    wastewater, and
    other aqueous
    matrices using capillary
    ion electrophoresis
    (CIE) with
    indirect UV detection.
    See Fig. 1 through
    6.
    1.2 The
    test method uses
    a chromate-based electrolyte
    and indirect UV detection
    at
    254
    nm. It is
    applicable
    for the determination
    of inorganic anions
    in the
    range of 0.2 to 50 mgJL except for fluoride
    whose range is 0.2 to 25
    mgJL.
    1.3 It is the
    responsibility
    of
    the
    user to ensure the
    validity of this test
    method for
    other anion concentrations and untested
    aqueous matrices.
    Note 1: The
    highest accepted anion
    concentration submitted for
    P&B extend the anion
    concentration range for the following
    anions; Chloride to
    93 mg/L, Sulfate to 90
    mgJL,
    Nitrate to 72 mg/L, and ortho-phosphate to
    58
    mg/L.
    1.4 This
    method does not purport
    to address all of
    the safety
    problems,
    if
    any,
    associated with its use, It is the
    responsibility
    of
    the user
    of this standard
    to
    establish
    appropriate
    safety
    and health practices
    and determine the
    applicability
    of
    reciulatorv
    limitations
    prior
    to use.
    For specific hazard
    statements,
    see
    sec.
    9.

    2
    2 Referenced
    Documents
    2.1 ASTM
    Standards
    D
    1066
    Practice
    for
    Sampling
    Steam1
    1
    D
    1129
    Terminology
    Relating
    to Water
    D 1193
    Specification
    for Reagent
    Water
    1
    D 2777
    Practice
    for Determination
    of
    Precision
    and Bias
    of
    Applicable
    Methods
    of
    Committee
    D-1
    9
    on Water
    1
    D
    3370
    Practices
    for Sampling
    Water’
    D
    3856
    Guide for
    Good
    LaboratorX
    Practices
    in Laboratories
    Engaged
    in
    Sampling
    and
    Analysis of
    Water
    D
    5810
    Standard
    Practice
    of
    Spiking
    Samples’
    D
    5847
    Standard
    Practice for
    Writing
    Quality
    Control
    Specifications
    for
    Standard
    Test
    Methods
    for
    Water Analysis
    1
    D
    5905
    Standard
    Specification
    for Substitute
    Wastewater
    1
    F 488
    Test
    Method
    for Total
    Bacterial
    Count in
    Water
    2
    2.2
    EPA 40 CFR
    Ch.1
    (7-1-92 Edition),
    Pt
    136, App.
    B, page
    565
    —567:
    Definition
    and Procedure
    for the
    Determination
    of the
    Method
    Detection
    Limit-Revision
    1.11.
    2.3
    Draft Protocol
    for EPA
    Approval
    of New Methods
    for
    Organic
    and Inorganic
    Analytes
    in
    Wastewater
    and
    Drinking
    Water,
    dated
    Mar
    1999, EPA-821-B-98-003.
    3
    Terminology
    3.1
    Definitions
    -
    For definitions
    of terms
    used in
    this test method,
    refer
    to
    Terminology
    D1129.
    3.2
    Description
    of
    Terms Specific
    to
    This
    Test Standard:
    3.2.1 Capillary
    Ion Electrophoresis
    -- an
    electrophoretic
    technique
    in which
    an
    UV
    absorbing
    electrolyte
    is placed
    in a
    50
    pm
    to 75
    pm fused
    silica capillary.
    Voltage
    is
    applied across
    the
    capillary
    causing
    electrolyte
    and anions
    to
    migrate
    towards
    the anode
    and
    through
    the
    capillary’s
    UV detector
    window.
    Anions
    are separated
    based
    upon
    the
    their
    differential
    rates
    of migration
    in
    the
    electrical
    field.
    Anion detection
    and quantitation
    are
    based
    upon the
    principles
    of
    indirect
    UV
    detection.
    3.2.2 Electrolyte
    -- combination
    of a
    UV absorbing
    salt
    and
    an electroosmotic
    flow
    modifier
    placed
    inside the
    capillary,
    used
    as a
    carrier
    for
    the analytes,
    and
    for
    detection
    and
    quantitation.
    The
    UV
    absorbing
    portion
    of
    the
    salt must
    be
    anionic
    and
    have
    an electrophoretic
    mobility
    similar
    to
    the analyte
    anions
    of interest.
    3.2.3
    Electroosmotic
    Flow (EOF)
    --
    the
    direction
    and
    velocity
    of
    electrolyte
    solution
    flow
    within
    the capillary
    under
    an applied
    electrical
    potential
    (voltage);
    the
    velocity
    and
    direction
    of flow
    is determined
    by electrolyte
    chemistry,
    capillary
    wall
    chemistry,
    and
    applied
    voltage.
    3.2.4
    Electroosmotic
    Flow
    Modifier
    (OFM)
    -- a cationic
    quaternary
    amine
    in the
    electrolyte
    that dynamically
    coats the
    negatively
    charged
    silica
    wall giving
    it
    a
    net
    positive
    charge.
    This reverses
    the
    direction
    of the
    electrolyte’s
    natural
    electroosmotic
    flow
    and
    directs
    it towards
    the anode
    and
    detector.
    This modifier
    augments
    anion
    migration
    and
    enhances
    speed of
    analysis.
    Its
    concentration
    secondarily
    effects
    anion
    selectivity
    and
    resolution.
    See
    Fig. 7.
    1) Annual
    Book of
    ASTM
    Standards,
    Vol. 11.01
    2) Annual
    Book of
    ASTM
    Standards,
    Vol. 11.02

    3
    3.2.5
    Electrophoretic
    Mobility -- the specific velocity of
    a charged analyte in
    the
    electrolyte
    under specific electroosmotic flow conditions. The mobility of
    an
    analyte
    is
    directly related to
    the
    analyte’s equivalent ionic conductance
    and
    applied voltage, and is the primary mechanism of separation.
    3.2.6
    Electropherogram
    -- a
    graphical
    presentation of UV
    detector
    response
    versus
    time
    of
    analysis;
    the x
    axis
    is
    migration time which is used
    to qualitatively
    identify
    the anion,
    and the
    y
    axis is
    UV
    response which
    can be
    converted
    to
    time
    corrected peak
    area
    for
    quantitation.
    3.2.7
    Hydrostatic Sampling
    -- a
    sample introduction
    technique
    in
    which the capillary
    with electrolyte
    is
    immersed
    in the
    sample, and both
    are
    elevated
    to
    a specific
    height, typically
    10 cm, above
    the
    receiving
    electrolyte
    reservoir
    for a preset
    amount of
    time, typically less than
    60
    s.
    Nanolitres
    of
    sample
    are
    siphoned into
    the
    capillary by
    differential
    head
    pressure
    and gravity.
    3.2.8 Indirect UV
    Detection -- a
    form
    of
    UV detection in
    which the
    analyte displaces
    an
    equivalent
    net charge
    amount of
    the
    highly UV absorbing component
    of
    the
    electrolyte
    causing
    a net
    decrease
    in
    background absorbance. The magnitude
    of the decreased
    absorbance is
    directly proportional
    to analyte concentration.
    Detector output
    polarity is reversed in order
    to
    obtain a
    positive mV response.
    3.2.9.Midpoint of
    Peak Width
    -- CIE
    peaks
    are
    typically asymmetrical
    with the
    peak
    apex
    shifting
    with
    increasing concentration,
    and peak
    apex
    may not
    be
    indicative of
    true
    analyte migration time.
    Midpoint of
    peak
    width
    is the
    midpoint
    between the analyte peak’s
    start
    and
    stop
    integration,
    or
    the peak center
    of
    gravity.
    3.2.10
    Migration
    Time
    --the time required
    for a
    specific
    analyte
    to
    migrate
    through
    the
    capillary to
    the detector. The
    migration time in capillary
    ion
    electrophoresis is
    analogous
    to retention
    time
    in
    chromatography.
    3.2.11 Time Corrected
    Peak Area
    -- normalized peak area;
    peak area divided
    by
    migration
    time.
    CE
    principles state
    that peak
    area is dependent
    upon
    migration
    time, i.e.
    for
    the
    same concentration
    of analyte, as
    migration time
    increases
    (decreases) peak area increases (decreases).
    Time corrected
    peak
    area
    accounts for
    these changes.
    4
    Summary
    of
    Test Method
    4.1 Capillary
    ion
    electrophoresis, see
    Fig. 7
    through Fig. 10,
    is a
    free zone
    electrophoretic technique optimized
    for the
    determination
    of
    anions
    with
    molecular
    weight
    less than 200. The anions
    migrate and
    are separated according
    to their
    mobility
    in
    the electrolyte when
    an electrical field is
    applied through
    the
    open
    tubular fused
    silica
    capillary. The
    electrolyte’s
    electroosmotic low
    modifier
    dynamically coats the inner wall of the
    capillary
    changing the surface
    to
    a net
    positive charge. This reversal of
    wall
    charge
    reverses
    the
    natural
    EOF.
    The
    modified
    EOF in combination with
    a negative
    power supply augments
    the
    mobility
    of the analyte
    anions towards the
    anode
    and detector achieving
    rapid
    analysis
    times. Cations migrate in the opposite
    direction
    towards the cathode
    and
    are
    removed from the sample during
    analysis. Water
    and other neutral
    species
    move
    toward the
    detector at
    the same rate
    as the EOF.
    The neutral species
    migrate
    slower than the analyte anions and do
    not interfere
    with anion analysis.
    See Fig.
    7 and
    8.

    4
    4.2 Sample
    is
    introduced into the
    capillary
    using
    hydrostatic
    sampling.
    The
    inlet
    of
    the
    capillary
    containing
    electrolyte
    is immersed
    in
    the
    sample
    and
    the
    height
    of the
    sample
    raised
    10
    cm for
    30
    s where
    low
    nanolitre
    volumes
    are
    siphoned
    into
    the
    capillary.
    After
    sample
    loading,
    the
    capillary
    is immediately
    immersed
    back
    into
    the
    electrolyte.
    The
    voltage
    is applied
    initiating
    the
    separation
    process.
    4.3
    Anion
    detection
    is based
    upon the
    principles
    of indirect
    UV detection.
    The
    UV
    absorbing
    electrolyte
    anion
    is
    displaced
    charge-for-charge
    by the
    separated
    analyte
    anion.
    The
    analyte
    anion
    zone
    has a
    net decrease
    in background
    absorbance.
    This
    decrease
    in UV
    absorbance
    is
    quantitatively
    proportional
    to
    analyte
    anion
    concentration.
    See
    Fig.
    9.
    Detector
    output
    polarity
    is
    reversed
    to
    provide
    positive
    mV
    response
    to the
    data system,
    and to
    make the
    negative
    absorbance
    peaks
    appear
    positive.
    4.4
    The
    analysis
    is
    complete
    once
    the
    last
    anion
    of
    interest
    is detected.
    The
    capillary
    is automatically
    vacuum
    purged
    by the
    system
    of
    any
    remaining
    sample,
    and
    replenished with fresh
    electrolyte.
    The
    system
    is now
    ready
    for
    the
    next
    analysis.
    5
    Significance
    and
    Use
    5.1
    Capillary
    ion electrophoresis provides
    a
    simultaneous
    separation
    and
    determination
    of
    several
    inorganic
    anions
    using
    nanolitres
    of
    sample
    in
    a
    single
    injection.
    All
    anions
    present
    in
    the sample
    matrix
    will
    be
    visualized
    yielding
    an
    anionic
    profile
    of the
    sample.
    5.2 Analysis
    time is
    less
    than
    5 mm
    with
    sufficient
    sensitivity
    for
    drinking
    water,
    and
    wastewater
    applications.
    Time
    between
    samplings
    is less
    than
    7 minutes
    allowing
    for
    high
    sample
    throughput.
    5.3
    Minimal
    sample
    preparation
    is
    necessary
    for
    drinking
    water
    and
    wastewater
    matrices.
    Typically
    only a
    dilution
    with
    water is
    needed.
    5.4 This
    test
    method
    is
    intended
    as
    an alternative
    to other
    multi-analyte
    methods
    and
    various
    wet chemistries
    for the
    determination
    of inorganic
    anions
    in
    water
    and
    wastewater.
    Compared
    to
    other multi-analyte
    methods
    the
    major
    benefits
    of
    CIE
    are
    speed
    of
    analysis,
    simplicity,
    and reduced
    reagent
    consumption
    and
    operating
    costs.
    6
    Interferences
    6.1
    Analyte
    identification,
    quantitation,
    and
    possible
    comigration
    occur
    when
    one
    anion
    is
    in
    significant
    excess
    to
    other
    anions
    in
    the sample
    matrix.
    For
    two
    adjacent
    peaks,
    reliable
    quantitation
    can
    be achieved
    when
    the concentration
    differential
    is less
    than 100:1.
    As
    the
    resolution
    between
    two
    anion
    peaks
    increase
    so does
    the
    tolerated
    concentration
    differential.
    In samples
    containing
    1000
    mgIL Cl,
    1 mgJL
    SO
    4
    can be
    resolved
    and
    quantitated,
    however,
    the high
    Cl
    will
    interfere
    with
    Br
    and
    NO
    2quantitation.
    6.2 Dissolved
    carbonate,
    detected
    as
    HC0
    31
    ,
    is
    an anion
    present
    in
    all aqueous
    samples,
    especially
    alkaline
    samples.
    Carbonate
    concentrations
    greater
    than
    500
    mg/L
    will interfere
    with
    PC
    4
    quantitation.
    6.3
    Monovalent organic
    acids,
    except
    for
    formate,
    and
    neutral
    organics
    commonly
    found
    in wastewater
    migrate
    later
    in the electropherogram,
    after
    carbonate,
    and
    do not
    interfere.
    Formate,
    a
    common
    organic
    acid
    found
    in environmental
    samples,
    migrates
    shortly
    after
    fluoride
    but
    before
    phosphate.
    Formate
    concentrations greater
    than
    5 mg/L
    will interfere
    with
    fluoride
    identification
    and
    quantitation.
    Inclusion
    of
    2 mgIL
    formate
    into
    the
    Mixed
    Anion
    Working
    Solution
    aids
    in
    fluoride
    and
    formate
    identification
    and quantitation.

    5
    6.4
    Divalent organic
    acids usually
    found
    in wastewater
    migrate
    after
    phosphate.
    At
    high
    concentrations,
    greater
    than
    10
    mgJL,
    they
    may
    interfere
    with
    phosphate
    identification
    and quantitation.
    6.5
    Chlorate
    also
    migrates
    after phosphate
    and
    at concentrations
    greater than
    10
    mgJL
    will
    interfere
    with phosphate
    identification
    and
    quantitation.
    Inclusion
    of
    5
    mglL chlorate
    into the
    Mixed Anion
    Working
    Solution
    aids in phosphate
    and
    chlorate
    identification
    and
    quantitation.
    6.6
    As
    analyte
    concentration
    increases,
    analyte
    peak
    shape
    becomes
    asymmetrical.
    If
    adjacent
    analyte
    peaks are
    not baseline
    resolved,
    the data
    system
    will drop
    a
    perpendicular
    between
    them
    to
    the
    baseline.
    This causes
    a
    decrease
    in
    peak
    area
    for
    both
    analyte peaks
    and
    a
    low bias
    for
    analyte
    amounts.
    For optimal
    quantitation,
    insure that
    adjacent
    peaks
    are fully
    resolved,
    if they
    are
    not,
    dilute
    the sample
    1:1 with
    water.
    6.7
    Samples
    containing
    high
    levels
    of
    TOC, total
    organic
    carbon,
    may
    effect
    the
    observed
    analyte migration
    times.
    The
    TOC
    binds
    to
    the
    capillary
    surface
    decreasing
    the
    EOF
    and increasing
    analyte
    migration
    times. Refer
    to Figure
    7.
    However,
    the change
    in EOF
    does not
    effect
    analyte
    selectivity.
    Analytes
    are
    identified
    using
    normalized
    analyte
    migration
    times
    with respect
    to
    a reference
    peak,
    chloride,
    always
    the
    first
    peak
    in the
    electropherogram.
    The
    surface
    can be
    regenerated
    with
    a 5
    minute wash
    with
    500 mM
    NaOH.
    7
    .Apparatus
    7.1
    Capillary
    Ion Electrophoresis
    System
    -- the
    system
    consists
    of
    the following
    components,
    as shown
    in Fig. 10,
    or
    equivalent:
    3
    7.1.1
    High
    Voltage
    Power
    Supply
    -- capable
    of generating
    voltage
    (potential)
    between
    0
    and
    minus 30
    kV
    relative
    to ground
    with the
    capability
    working
    in
    a
    constant
    current
    mode.
    7.1.2
    Covered
    Sample Carousel
    --
    to prevent
    environmental
    contamination
    of
    the
    samples
    and electrolytes
    during
    a multi-sample
    batch
    analysis.
    7.1.3
    Sample
    Introduction
    Mechanism
    -- capable
    of
    hydrostatic
    sampling
    technique,
    using
    gravity,
    positive
    pressure,
    or
    equivalent.
    7.1.4
    Capillary
    Purge
    Mechanism
    -- to
    purge the
    capillary
    after every
    analysis
    with
    fresh
    electrolyte
    to eliminate
    any
    interference
    from
    the
    previous
    sample
    matrix,
    and to
    clean
    the
    capillary
    with
    other
    reagents,
    such
    as
    sodium
    hydroxide.
    7.1.5 UV Detector
    --
    having
    the
    capability
    of monitoring
    254 nm,
    or equivalent,
    with
    a
    time
    constant
    of
    0.3
    S.
    7.1.6 Fused
    Silica
    Capillary
    --
    a 75
    pm
    (inner
    diameter)
    x 375 pm
    (outer
    diameter)
    x
    60 cm
    (length)
    having
    a polymer
    coating
    for flexibity,
    and
    a non-coated
    section
    to act as
    the cell window
    for UV
    detection.
    7.1.7
    Constant
    Temperature
    Compartment
    -- to
    keep the
    samples,
    capillary,
    and
    electrolytes
    at
    constant
    temperature.
    3)
    Available
    from Waters,
    34 Maple
    St., Milford,
    Ma.,
    01757,
    800/252-4752.

    6
    7.2
    Data
    System
    -- computer
    system
    that can
    acquire data
    at 20
    points
    per second
    minimum,
    express
    migration
    time
    in
    minutes
    to
    3
    decimal
    places,
    use
    midpoint
    of
    the
    analyte
    peak
    width,
    or center
    of
    gravity,
    to determine
    the
    analyte
    migration
    time,
    use normalized
    migration
    times
    with respect
    to a
    reference
    peak for
    qualitative
    identification,
    use
    time corrected
    peak
    area
    response
    for analyte
    quantitation,
    and
    express
    results in
    concentration
    units.3
    Note 2:
    It is
    recommended
    that integrators
    or
    standard
    chromatographic
    data processing
    not
    be
    used with
    this
    test
    method.
    7.3
    Anion
    Exchange
    Cartridges
    in
    the
    Hydroxide
    form.4
    7.4
    Plastic
    Syringe
    -- 20
    mL, Disposable.
    7.5 Vacuum
    Filtration
    Apparatus
    -- capable
    for filtering
    100
    mL of
    reagent
    through
    a
    0.45 m
    aqueous
    filter.
    8
    Reagents
    and
    Materials
    8.1
    Purity
    of
    Reagents:
    -- Unless
    otherwise
    indicated,
    it is
    intended
    that all reagents
    shall conform
    to the reagent
    grade
    specification
    of
    the
    Analytical
    Reagents
    of the
    American
    Chemical
    Society,
    where
    such specifications
    are
    available.
    Other
    grades
    may be
    used,
    provided
    it
    is first
    ascertained
    that
    the
    reagent
    is
    of
    sufficient
    high
    purity
    to permit
    its use without
    lessening
    the
    performance
    or accuracy
    of the
    determination.
    Reagent chemicals
    shall
    be used
    for all tests.
    Note
    3:
    Calibration
    and detection
    limits
    of
    this
    method
    are
    biased
    by
    the
    purity
    of
    the
    reagents.
    8.2
    Purity
    of
    Water:--
    Unless
    otherwise
    indicated,
    references
    to water
    shall
    be
    understood
    to mean
    Type I reagent
    water
    conforming
    or
    exceeding
    specification
    Dli 93.
    Freshly
    drawn
    water
    should
    be
    used
    fr preparation
    of
    all stock
    and
    working
    standards,
    electrolytes,
    and
    solutions.
    Performance
    and
    detection
    limits
    of this
    method
    are
    limited by
    the purity
    of
    reagent
    water, especially
    TOC.
    8.3
    Reagent Blank:
    Reagent
    Water
    or any other
    solution
    used to
    preserve
    or
    dilute
    the sample.
    8.4 Individual
    Anion
    Solution,
    Stock:
    Note
    4: It is
    suggested
    that certified
    individual
    1000 mg/L
    anion
    standards
    be
    purchased
    for use
    with this
    test method.
    Note
    5: All
    weights
    given
    are for anhydrous
    or
    dried salts.
    Must account
    for reagent
    purity to
    calculate
    true value concentration.
    Certify
    against
    NIST
    traceable
    standards.
    8.4.1
    Bromide
    Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0
    mL = 1.00
    mci
    Bromide):
    Dry
    approximately
    0.5
    g
    of
    sodium bromide
    (NaBr) for
    6
    h at 150°C
    and
    cool
    in
    a
    desiccator.
    Dissolve
    0.128
    g
    of the dry
    salt in
    a 100
    mL
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and
    fill to
    mark with
    water.
    4)
    Available
    from
    Alltech
    Associates,
    PIN 30254,
    2051 Waukegan
    Rd,
    Deerfield
    IL., 60015,
    847/948-
    8600.
    5)
    Reagent
    Chemicals,
    American Chemical
    Society
    Specifications,
    Am. Chem.
    Soc.,
    Washington,
    DC
    For suggestions
    on
    the testing
    of reagents
    not listed
    by the American
    Chemical
    Society,
    see
    Analar
    Standards
    for
    Laboratory
    Chemicals,
    BDH
    Ltd.,
    Poole,
    Dorset.
    U.K., and
    the
    United
    States
    Pharmacopeia
    and
    National
    Formulary,
    U.S.
    Pharmacopoeia
    Convention,
    Inc. (USPC),
    Rockville,
    Md.
    6)
    Although
    the
    reagent
    water may
    exceed
    Dli 93 specification,
    the
    reagent water
    needs to
    be
    periodically
    tested for
    bacterial
    contamination.
    Bacteria
    and their
    waste products
    may
    adversely
    affect
    system
    performance.
    As
    a
    guide,
    ASTM
    type
    IA water
    specifies
    a
    total
    bacteria
    count
    of 10
    colonies/L.
    Refer to
    Test Method
    F 488
    for analysis
    procedure.

    7
    8.4.2
    Chloride
    Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0
    mL
    = 1.00
    mg
    Chloride):
    Dry
    approximately 0.5
    g
    of
    sodium
    chloride
    (NaCI)
    for 1 h
    at 100°C
    and cool
    in
    a
    desiccator. Dissolve
    0.165
    g
    of the
    dry
    salt in
    a
    100
    mL a
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and fill
    to
    mark
    with water.
    8.4.3
    Fluoride
    Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0
    mL
    =
    1.00
    mcj
    Fluoride):
    Dry
    approximately
    0.5 g
    of
    sodium
    fluoride
    (NaF)
    for
    1
    h
    at
    100°C
    and
    cool ina
    desiccator.
    Dissolve
    0.221
    g
    of the
    dry
    salt
    in a 100
    mL volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and
    fill to
    mark
    with
    water.
    8.4.4
    Formate
    Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0
    mL
    = 1.00
    mq
    Formate):
    Dissolve
    0.151
    g
    of
    sodium
    formate
    in a 100
    mL volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and
    fill
    to
    mark
    with
    water.
    8.4.5
    Nitrate
    Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0
    mL
    = 1.00
    m
    Nitrate):
    Dry
    approximately
    0.5
    g
    of
    sodium
    nitrate
    (NaNO
    3
    )
    for
    48 h
    at 105°C
    and
    cool
    in
    a
    desiccator. Dissolve
    0.137
    g
    of
    the dry
    salt
    in
    a 100
    mL
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and fill
    to
    mark with
    water.
    8.4.6
    Nitrite
    Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0
    mL
    = 1.00
    mq
    Nitrite):
    Dry
    approximately 0.5
    g
    of
    sodium
    nitrite
    (NaNO
    2
    )
    for 24
    h in a desiccator
    containing
    concentrated
    sulfuric
    acid.
    Dissolve
    0.150
    g
    of the
    dry
    salt
    in
    a
    100
    mL
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and
    fill to
    mark
    with
    water.
    Store
    in
    a sterilized
    glass
    bottle.
    Refrigerate
    and
    prepare
    monthly.
    Note
    6:
    Nitrite
    is
    easily
    oxidized,
    especially
    in the presence
    of moisture.
    Use
    only fresh
    reagent.
    Note 7:
    Prepare
    sterile
    bottles for
    storing
    nitrite
    solutions
    by
    heating
    for 1
    h at
    1700C
    in
    an
    air
    oven.
    8.4.7
    Ortho-Phosphate Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0
    mL
    =
    1.00 mg
    o-Phosphate):
    Dissolve
    0.150
    g
    of
    anhydrous
    dibasic
    sodium
    phosphate
    (Na
    2
    HPO
    4
    )
    in
    a 100
    mL
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and fill
    to mark
    with
    water.
    8.4.8
    Sulfate
    Solution,
    Standard
    (1.0
    mL
    =
    1.00
    m
    Sulfate):
    Dry
    approximately
    0.5
    g
    of
    anhydrous
    sodium
    sulfate
    (Na
    2
    SO
    4
    )
    for 1 h
    at
    110°C
    and
    cool
    in a
    desiccator.
    Dissolve
    0.148
    g
    of
    the
    dry salt
    in
    a 100
    mL
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and fill
    to
    mark
    with
    water
    8.5
    Mixed
    Anion
    Solution,
    WorkinQ:
    Prepare
    a 0.2
    mgIL
    and
    at
    least
    3 different
    working
    standards
    concentrations
    for
    the
    analyte
    anions
    of interest
    bracketing
    the
    desired
    range
    of analysis,
    typically
    between
    0.2
    and
    50
    mg/L,
    and
    add
    2
    mgIL
    formate
    to
    all
    standards.
    Add
    an
    appropriate
    aliquot
    of Individual
    Anion
    Stock
    Solution
    (8.4)
    to
    a
    pre-rinsed
    100
    mL volumetric
    flask,
    and dilute
    to
    100
    mL
    with
    water.
    Note 8: Use
    100
    L
    of Individual
    Anion
    Stock
    Solution
    (8.4)
    per 100
    mL for
    1 mg/L
    anion.
    Note
    9:
    Anions
    of
    no interest
    may
    be
    omitted.
    Note
    10:
    The
    mid-range
    Mixed
    Anion
    Solution,
    Working
    may
    be
    used
    for
    the
    determination
    of
    migration
    times
    and
    resolution
    described
    in 12.1.
    8.6
    Calibration
    Verification
    Solution
    (CVS):
    A
    solution
    formulated
    by the
    laboratory
    of
    mixed
    analytes
    of
    known
    concentration
    prepared
    in water.
    The
    CVS
    solution
    must
    be
    prepared
    from
    a
    different
    source
    to
    the
    calibration
    standards.
    8.7
    Performance Evaluation
    Solution
    (PES):
    A
    solution
    formulated
    by
    an
    independent
    source
    of
    mixed
    analytes
    of known
    concentration
    prepared
    in water.
    Ideally,
    the
    PES
    solution
    should
    be purchased
    from
    an
    independent
    source.

    8
    8.8
    Quality
    Control
    Solution
    (QCS):
    A
    solution
    of
    known analyte
    concentrations
    added
    to
    a
    synthetic
    sample matrix
    such
    as
    Substitute
    Wastewater
    that
    sufficiently
    challenges
    the
    Test
    Method.
    8.9
    Buffer
    Solution
    (100
    mM CHES
    I
    1 mM
    Calcium
    Gluconate):
    Dissolve
    20.73
    g
    of
    CHES
    (2-[N-Cyclohexylamino]-Ethane
    Sulfonic
    Acid)
    and 0.43
    g
    of
    Calcium
    Gluconate
    in a 1 L
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water, and
    dilute to
    1
    L
    with
    water.
    This
    concentrate
    may
    be stored
    in a capped
    glass
    or plastic
    container
    for up to
    lyear.
    8.10 Chromate
    Concentrate
    Solution
    (100
    mM Sodium
    Chromate):
    Dissolve
    23.41
    g
    of
    sodium
    chromate
    tetrahydrate
    (Na
    2
    CrO
    4
    .4
    H
    2
    0)
    in a 1 L volumetric
    flask
    with
    water,
    and
    dilute
    to
    1 L
    with
    water. This
    concentrate
    may be
    stored
    in a capped
    glass
    or
    plastic container
    for up to
    1
    year.
    8.11
    OFM
    Concentrate
    Solution
    (100
    mM Tetradecyltrimethyl
    Ammonium
    Bromide):
    Dissolve
    33.65 g
    of
    Tetradecyltrimethyl
    Ammonium
    Bromide
    (TTABr)
    in a 1
    L
    volumetric
    flask with
    water,
    and
    dilute
    to 1
    L with water.
    Store
    this
    solution
    in a
    capped
    glass
    or
    plastic container
    for
    up to
    1 year.
    Note
    11:
    TTABr
    needs to
    be converted
    to the hydroxide
    form
    7
    (TTAOH)
    for use with this
    test
    method.
    TTAOH
    is
    commercially
    available
    as
    100 mM
    TTAOH
    which
    is an equivalent
    substitute.
    8.12
    Sodium
    Hydroxide
    Solution
    (500 mM
    Sodium
    Hydroxide)--
    Dissolve
    20
    gof
    sodium
    hydroxide
    (NaOH)
    in
    a
    1
    L plastic
    volumetric
    flask
    with
    water, and
    dilute to
    1 L with
    water.
    8.13
    Electrolyte
    Solution,
    Workin
    (4.7
    mM
    Chromate
    /
    4
    mM
    TTAOH
    / 10 mM CHES
    I
    0.1 mM
    Calcium
    Gluconate)
    : Wash
    the anion
    exchange
    cartridge
    in the
    hydroxide
    form (7.3)
    using
    the
    20
    mL
    plastic
    syringe
    (7.4)
    with 10
    mL
    of
    500 mM
    NaOH
    (8.12)
    followed
    by 10 mL
    of
    water.
    Discard
    the
    washings.
    Slowly pass
    4 mL
    of
    the
    100
    mM
    TTABr
    Solution
    (8.11)
    through
    the
    cartridge
    into
    a
    100
    mL
    volumetric
    flask.
    Rinse the
    cartridge
    with
    20 mL
    of water, adding
    the washing
    to the
    volumetric
    flask.
    Note 12:
    The
    above
    procedure is
    used
    to convert
    the
    TTABr to
    TTAOH,
    which is used
    in the
    electrolyte.
    If
    using
    commercially
    available
    100
    mM TTAOH,
    the above
    conversion
    step
    is
    not
    necessary;
    substitute
    0.5 mL of
    100
    mM TTAOH
    and continue
    below
    Into
    the 100 mL
    volumetric
    flask
    add 4.7
    mL of
    Chromate
    Concentrate
    Solution
    (8.10)
    and
    10 mL of Buffer
    solution
    (8.9).
    Mix
    and dilute
    to 100 mL
    with
    water.
    The
    natural pH
    of the
    electrolyte
    should
    be
    9 ± 0.1.
    Filter and
    degas
    using
    the
    vacuum
    filtration
    apparatus.
    Store
    the
    any
    remaining
    electrolyte
    in
    a
    capped
    glass
    or plastic
    container
    at ambient
    temperature.
    The
    electrolyte
    is
    stable
    for
    1
    year.
    7) Available
    from
    Waters
    Corp. as lonSelect
    100mM
    OEM
    Hydroxide
    Concentrate,
    100
    mM
    TTAOH,
    PIN
    49387.
    8)
    Availiable from
    Waters
    Corp.
    as lonSelect
    High
    Mobility Anion
    Electrolyte,
    PIN
    49385.

    9
    9
    Precautions
    9.1
    Chemicals used
    in this
    test
    method
    are
    typical
    of many
    useful
    laboratory
    chemicals,
    reagents
    and
    cleaning
    solutions,
    which
    can
    be
    hazardous
    if not
    handled
    properly.
    Refer
    to Guide
    D
    3856.
    9.2
    It is
    the responsibility
    of
    the
    user
    to prepare,
    handle,
    and
    dispose
    of chemical
    solutions
    in
    accordance with
    all applicable
    federal,
    state,
    and
    local
    regulations.
    9.3
    Warning
    -- This
    capillary
    electrophoresis
    method
    uses
    high
    voltage
    as
    a
    means
    for
    separating
    the
    analyte
    anions,
    and
    can
    be hazardous
    if
    not
    used
    properly.
    Use
    only
    those
    instruments
    that
    have
    all
    proper
    safety
    features.
    10
    Sampling
    10.1 Collect
    samples
    in
    accordance
    with
    Practice
    D 3370.
    10.2
    Rinse
    samples
    containers
    with
    sample
    and discard
    to eliminate
    any
    contamination from
    the
    container.
    Fill
    to overflowing
    and
    cap
    to exclude
    air.
    10.3 Analyze
    samples
    as
    soon as
    possible
    after
    collection.
    For
    nitrite,
    nitrate,
    and
    phosphate
    refrigerate the
    sample
    at
    4°C
    after
    collection.
    Warm
    to room
    temperature before
    dilution
    and
    analysis.
    10.4
    At the
    lab, filter
    samples
    containing
    suspended
    solids
    through
    a
    pre-rinsed
    0.45
    pm
    aqueous
    compatible
    membrane
    filter
    before
    analysis.
    10.5
    If sample
    dilution
    is
    required
    to remain
    within
    the
    scope
    of
    this
    Test Method,
    dilute
    with water
    only.
    11
    Preparation
    of Apparatus
    11.1
    Set up
    the
    CE
    and
    data
    system
    according
    to
    the manufacturer’s
    instructions.
    11
    2
    Program
    the CE
    system
    to maintain
    a
    constant
    temperature
    of 25°
    ±
    0.5°C;
    or
    5°C
    above
    ambient
    laboratory
    temperature.
    Fill
    the
    electrolyte
    reservoirs
    with
    fresh
    chromate
    electrolyte
    working
    solution
    (8.13),
    and
    allow
    10 mm
    for
    thermal
    equilibration.
    11.3
    Condition
    a
    new
    capillary
    (7.1.6)
    with
    500 mM
    NaOH
    Solution
    (8.12)
    for
    5 mm
    followed
    by
    water
    for
    5
    mm.
    Purge the
    capillary
    with
    electrolyte
    (8.13)
    for
    3
    mm.
    11.4
    Apply
    15 kV
    of voltage
    and
    test for
    current.
    The current
    should
    be 14±
    1
    pA.
    If
    no
    current
    is
    observed,
    then
    there
    is
    a
    bubble
    and/or
    blockage
    in the
    capillary.
    Degas
    the
    chromate
    electrolyte
    working
    solution
    and
    retry.
    If still
    no current,
    replace
    the
    capillary.
    11.5
    Set
    the
    UV detector
    to
    254
    nm detection,
    or equivalent.
    Zero the
    detector
    to
    0.000
    absorbance.
    UV offset
    is
    less then
    0.1 AU.
    11.6
    Program
    the CE
    system
    for
    constant
    current
    of 14
    pA.
    11.7
    Program
    the
    CE
    system
    for
    a hydrostatic
    sampling
    of
    30
    s. Approximately
    37nL
    of
    sample
    is
    siphoned
    into
    the
    capillary.
    Different
    sampling
    times
    may
    be
    used
    provided
    that
    the
    samples
    and
    standards
    are
    analyzed
    identically.
    11.8
    Program
    the
    CE
    system
    for
    a 1 mm
    purge
    with
    the
    chromate
    electrolyte
    working
    solution
    between
    each
    analysis.
    Using
    a
    15
    psi
    vacuum
    purge
    mechanism,
    one
    60
    cm
    capillary
    volume
    can
    be
    displaced
    in
    30
    s.

    10
    11.9
    Program
    the
    data system
    for an
    acquisition
    rate
    of
    at
    least
    20
    points
    per
    s.
    Program
    the data
    system to
    identify
    analyte
    peaks based
    upon
    normalized
    migration
    time
    using
    Cl as
    the reference
    peak,
    and
    to quantitate
    analyte
    peak
    response
    using
    time
    corrected
    peak
    area.
    Note 13: Under
    the analysis
    conditions
    Cl
    is always the
    first
    peak
    in
    the
    electropherogram,
    and
    can be
    used as
    a
    migration time
    reference
    peak.
    12
    Calibration
    12.1
    Determination
    of
    Migration
    Times--
    Calibrate
    Daily.
    The migration
    time
    of an
    anion is
    dependent
    upon
    the
    electrolyte
    composition,
    pH, capillary
    surface
    and
    length,
    applied
    voltage, the
    ionic
    strength
    of the
    sample,
    and
    temperature.
    For
    every
    fresh
    electrolyte
    determine
    the analyte
    migration
    time, in mm
    to
    the
    third
    decimal
    place,
    of the
    mid-range
    mixed anion
    standard
    working
    solution
    (8.5),
    described
    in
    Sec
    11. Use
    the
    mid-point
    of analyte
    peak
    width as the
    determinant
    of
    analyte
    migration
    time.
    Note 14:
    Analyte
    peak apex
    may
    be
    used as
    the
    migration
    time
    determinant,
    but potential
    analyte
    misidentification
    may
    result
    with
    asymmetrical
    peak
    shape at high
    analyte
    concentrations.
    12.2 Analyze
    the blank
    (8.3),
    a 0.2
    mg/L,
    and
    at
    least
    3
    working
    mgIL
    solutions
    (8.5),
    using the
    set-up
    described
    in
    sec
    11. For each
    anion
    concentration
    (X-axis)
    plot
    time
    corrected
    peak
    area
    response
    (Y-axis).
    Determine
    the best
    linear
    calibration
    line
    through
    the
    data
    points,
    or
    use
    the
    linear
    regression
    calibration
    routine
    (1/X
    Weighting
    and Linear
    Through
    Zero) available
    in
    the
    data system.
    Note
    15:
    Do
    not
    use peak
    height
    for
    calibration.
    Peak
    area is
    directly related
    to migration
    time,
    i.e.
    for the
    same analyte
    concentration,
    increasing
    migration
    time gives
    increasing
    peak area.
    Note
    16:
    EPA recommends
    calibration
    at the
    minimum
    concentration
    of
    0.2 mgIL
    plus
    3 additional
    points.
    The
    r
    2
    (coefficient
    of determination)
    values
    should be
    greater
    than
    0.995;
    typical
    r
    2
    values
    obtained
    from
    the interlaboratory
    collaborative
    are
    given
    in
    Table
    A2.
    12.3 Calibrate
    daily
    and
    with each
    change
    in
    electrolyte,
    and
    validate
    by
    analyzing
    the
    CVS
    solution
    (8.6)
    according
    to procedure
    in
    Seci 6.4.
    12.4 After
    validation
    of
    linear multiple
    point
    calibration,
    a single
    point calibration
    solution
    can be
    used between
    0.2 and
    50
    mgJL
    for
    recalibration
    provided
    the
    quality
    control
    requirements
    in
    Sec
    16.4
    are
    met.
    13
    Procedure
    13.1 Dilute
    the
    sample,
    if necessary
    with
    water, to
    remain within
    the scope
    (Sec
    1.2,
    1.3)
    and calibration
    of this
    test method.
    Refer
    to
    Al .5.1.
    13.2
    Analyze
    all
    blanks
    (8.3),
    standards
    (8.5),
    and
    samples
    as described
    in
    Sec
    11
    using
    the
    quality control
    criteria
    described
    in
    Sec 16.5
    to 16.9.
    Refer to
    Fig.
    1
    through
    5
    for
    representative
    anion
    standard,
    detection
    limit standard,
    substitute
    wastewater,
    drinking
    water, and
    wastewater
    electropherograms.
    13.3 Analyze
    all blanks,
    calibration
    standards,
    samples,
    and quality
    control
    solutions
    in
    singlicate.
    Perform
    at
    least
    one
    matrix
    spike analysis
    in
    duplicate
    as
    part
    of
    the
    QC
    protocol,
    Sec 16.7.
    Optional:
    Duplicate
    analyses
    are
    preferred
    due
    to
    short
    analysis
    times.
    Note 17: Collaborative
    data
    was
    acquired, submitted
    and
    evaluated
    as
    the average
    of
    duplicate
    samplings.

    11
    13.4
    After 20
    sample
    analyses,
    or
    batch, analyze
    the
    QCS
    solution
    (8.8). If
    necessary,
    recalibrate
    using
    a single
    mixed
    anion standard
    working
    solution
    (8.5),
    and
    replace
    analyte
    migration
    time.
    Note
    18: A
    change
    in analyte
    migration
    time of the
    mixed anion
    standard working
    solution
    by more
    than
    +5%
    suggests
    that
    components
    in
    the
    previously
    analyzed
    sample
    matrices
    have
    contaminated
    the
    capillary
    surface.
    Refer
    to
    sec
    6.7.
    Continue
    but
    wash the capillary
    with
    NaOH
    solution
    (8.12)
    before
    the next
    change in
    electrolyte.
    14
    Calculation
    14.1 Relate
    the
    time corrected
    peak
    area response
    for
    each analyte
    with the
    calibration
    curve generated
    in section
    12.2 to
    determine
    mg/L
    concentration
    of
    analyte
    anion.
    If the sample
    was
    diluted
    prior to
    analysis,
    then
    multiply
    mg/L
    anion by
    the
    dilution
    factor to obtain
    the
    original
    sample
    concentration,
    as
    follows:
    Original
    Sample
    mg/L
    Analyte =
    (A
    x SF)
    where;
    A
    = analyte
    concentration
    determined
    from
    the
    calibration
    curve,
    in
    mg/L,
    SF
    = scale
    or dilution
    factor.
    15 Report
    Format
    15.1 The
    sample
    analysis
    report should
    contain the
    sample
    name,
    analyte
    anion
    name,
    migration
    time
    reported
    to
    3 decimal
    places,
    migration
    time
    ratio,
    peak
    area,
    time
    corrected
    peak
    area,
    sample
    dilution,
    and
    original solution
    analyte
    concentration.
    Optional:
    Report analysis
    method
    parameters,
    date of
    sample
    data
    acquisition,
    and
    date
    of
    result
    processing
    for
    documentation
    and validation
    purposes.
    16
    Quality
    Control
    16.1 Before
    this
    test
    method
    is
    applied
    to the
    analysis
    of unknown
    samples,
    the
    analyst
    should
    establish
    quality
    control according
    to
    procedures
    recommended
    in
    Practice
    D5847, and
    Guide D5810.
    16.2 The
    laboratory
    using
    this
    test must
    perform an
    initial
    demonstration
    of
    laboratory
    capability
    according
    to
    procedures
    outlined
    in Standard
    Practice
    D5847,
    and
    Appendix
    C.
    Note
    19:
    Certified
    Performance
    Evaluation
    Solutions
    (PES)
    and
    QC
    Solutions
    (QCS and
    CVS)
    are
    commercially
    available,
    and
    recommended.
    16.3
    Initial
    Demonstration
    of Performance:
    Analyze
    seven
    replicates
    of a
    Performance
    Evaluation
    Solution
    (PES,
    8.7).
    Calculate
    analyte
    concentration
    mean
    and
    standard
    deviation
    of the
    seven replicates
    and compare
    to
    the
    precision
    and
    Initial
    %Recovery
    for the
    analyte
    in reagent
    water
    given
    in
    Table
    8.
    16.3.1
    Repeat
    the
    7 replicate
    analysis
    protocol before
    using a
    freshly
    prepared
    QVS
    solution
    (8.6)
    and
    QCS
    solution
    (8.8) for
    the first
    time.
    Calculate
    the
    standard
    deviation
    and
    compare
    with
    previous
    results
    using the
    student
    t-test.
    If no
    significant
    difference
    is
    noted then
    use the
    combined
    standard
    deviation
    to
    determine
    the
    QC
    limits,
    for
    the
    QVS
    and
    QCS
    solutions.
    16.4
    Calibration
    Verification:
    After
    calibration,
    verify
    the
    calibration
    linearity
    and
    acceptable
    instrument
    performance
    using a Calibration
    Verification
    Solution
    (8.6)
    treated
    as an
    unknown.
    If the
    determined
    CVS
    concentrations
    (8.6)
    are
    not
    within
    ± 3
    standard
    deviations
    of the known
    true
    values
    as
    described
    in 16.3.1,
    the
    calibration
    solutions
    may be
    out of control.
    Reanalyze,
    and
    if analyte
    concentration
    still falls
    outside
    the
    acceptable
    limits,
    fresh calibration
    solutions
    (8.5)
    are
    required.
    Successful
    CVS
    analyte
    concentration
    must
    be
    confirmed
    after
    recalibration
    before
    continuing
    with the
    Test
    Method.

    12
    16.5
    Analyze
    a
    reagent
    blank
    (8.3)
    with each
    batch
    to check
    for
    contamination
    introduced
    by
    the laboratory
    or
    use
    of the Test
    Method.
    16.6
    Quality
    Control
    Solution:
    Analyze
    one
    QCS
    (8.8)
    after
    20 samples,
    or batch.
    The
    analyte
    concentrations
    for the
    QCS
    should
    fall within
    the
    lower limit
    (LL)
    and
    upper
    limits
    (UL)
    given
    in Table
    8.
    16.7
    Matrix
    Spike
    Recovery:
    One Matrix
    Spike (MS)
    must be
    analyzed
    in
    duplicate
    with
    each
    batch
    of
    samples
    to test method
    recovery
    and
    relative
    %difference
    between
    them.
    Spike
    a
    portion
    of one
    sample
    from each
    batch
    with
    a
    known
    concentration
    of analyte,
    prepared
    in accordance
    with
    Guide
    D3856. The
    %
    recovery
    of the spike
    should
    fall
    within the
    MS/MSD
    lower
    and
    upper limits,
    and
    the
    Relative
    %Difference
    given
    in
    Table
    8
    for
    the appropriate
    sample
    matrix.
    If it
    does
    not,
    an
    interference
    may
    be
    present
    and the
    data
    for the set
    of similar
    samples
    matrices
    must
    be qualified
    with
    a warning
    that the
    data
    are suspect,
    or
    an alternate
    test method
    should be
    used. Refer
    to
    Guide
    D581
    0.
    16.7.1 If the
    known
    analyte
    concentration
    is between
    15
    and
    50 mg/L,
    then
    spike the
    sample
    solution
    to increase
    analyte
    concentration
    by 50%.
    16.7.2
    If
    the
    known analyte
    concentration
    is
    between
    2 mg/L
    and 15
    mgJL,
    then
    spike
    the
    sample
    solution
    to increase
    analyte
    concentration
    by 100%,
    but
    not
    less than
    2
    mg/L.
    16.7.3 If the
    known
    analyte
    concentration
    is
    less than
    2 mgIL,
    then
    spike the
    sample
    solution
    with 1 mgIL,
    5
    times
    the ML.
    16.7.4
    Calculate
    the
    percent
    recovery of
    the spike
    using
    the
    following
    formula:
    %
    Recovery
    =
    100
    [A (Vs+V)
    - B
    Vs]/C
    V
    where
    A
    = Analyte
    Concentration
    (mgIL) in
    Spiked Sample
    B
    = Analyte
    Concentration
    (mgIL)
    in Unspiked
    Sample
    C
    =
    Concentration
    (mgIL)
    of
    Analyte
    in Spiking
    Solution
    V
    = Volume
    (mL)
    of
    Sample
    Used
    V
    = Volume
    (mL) Added
    with Spike.
    Evaluate
    performance
    according
    to
    Practice
    D5847.
    16.8
    Method
    Precision:
    One
    unknown
    sample should
    be analyzed
    in triplicate
    with
    each
    batch
    to test method
    precision.
    Calculate
    the
    standard deviation
    and
    use
    the F-Test
    to
    compare
    with the
    single operator
    precision
    given
    in Tables
    1
    through
    7
    for
    the
    equivalent
    analyte
    concentration
    and
    matrix
    type.
    Evaluate
    performance
    according
    to
    Practice
    D5847.
    16.9
    The
    laboratory
    may perform
    additional
    quality control
    as
    desired
    or
    appropriate.
    17 Precision
    and
    Bias
    17.1 The
    precision
    and bias
    data presented
    in
    this
    test
    method
    meet the
    requirements
    of Practice
    2777-98,
    and are
    given in
    Tables
    1 through 7.
    The
    full
    Research
    Report,
    RR#
    Dl 9-1165,
    can
    be
    obtained
    from
    ASTM
    Headquarters.
    17.2
    This
    test
    method
    interlaboratory
    collaborative
    was performed
    by
    11
    laboratories
    using
    one
    operator
    each. Four
    Youden
    Pair spike
    concentrations
    for the
    7
    analytes
    anions yielding
    8
    analyte
    concentration
    levels.
    Test data
    was
    submitted
    for 11
    Reagent
    Waters,
    11 Substitute
    Wastewaters,
    15
    Drinking
    Waters,
    and 13
    Wastewater
    sample
    matrices.

    13
    17.3
    All
    data
    given
    in
    this method
    was
    quantitated
    using
    non-weighted
    linear
    calibration
    through
    zero,
    except
    where
    noted.
    17.4 The
    precision,
    bias,
    and
    matrix recovery
    of this test method
    per anion
    analyte
    in
    the 4 tested
    sample
    matrices are
    based upon
    the
    analyte
    true value,
    calculated
    using
    weight, volume, and
    purity.
    True
    value spiking
    solution
    concentrations
    are
    given in
    Table A4.
    17.5
    The bias and
    matrix recovery
    statements
    for less than
    2 mglL of chloride,
    sulfate,
    and
    nitrate in
    naturally
    occurring
    sample
    matrices
    maybe misleading
    due to
    spiking
    of small analyte
    concentration
    into a high naturally
    occurring
    analyte
    concentration
    observed
    with
    the
    matrix
    blank.
    The
    commonly occurring
    analyte
    concentrations
    observed
    in
    the sample
    matrix blanks for
    the naturally occurring
    tested
    matrices
    are given
    in Table A5.
    17.6 The high
    nitrate bias and
    %recovery
    noted
    for the
    0.5 mgIL
    NO
    3spike solution
    are
    attributed to the
    spiking solution
    containing
    50
    mgIL
    nitrite
    and
    0.5
    mg/L
    nitrate.
    Refer
    to Appendix
    Table A4, Solution
    3.
    Some
    of the
    nitrite
    converted
    to
    nitrate prior
    to analysis. Similar
    NO
    conversion
    effect
    is
    observed
    with the 2
    mgIL
    nitrate and 2 mg/L nitrite
    spike, Solution
    7.
    17.7
    All
    collaborative participants
    used the
    premade
    Chromate electrolyte,
    (lónSelect
    High Mobility Anion
    Electrolyte,
    available from
    Waters
    Corp.) Ten
    laboratories
    used
    a
    Waters
    CIA Analyzer
    with Millennium
    Data Processing
    Software,
    and one
    laboratory used a
    Agilent CE
    System with
    Diode Array
    Detector
    that provided
    equivalent
    results,
    although
    different
    sampling
    and
    detection
    conditions
    were
    necessary
    for equivalent performance.
    Note 20:
    Refer to reference Bi
    .16 and Agilent
    (the former HP
    Company) website
    for
    recommended
    operating conditions.
    18
    Key
    Words
    Anion
    Capillary Electrophoresis
    Drinking
    Water
    Ion Analysis
    Reagent Water
    Substitute Wastewater
    Wastewater

    14
    Appendix
    A
    Mandatory
    Information
    Al .1 All data
    presented
    in the
    following
    Tables
    conform
    and
    exceed the
    requirements
    of
    D2777-98.
    Data
    from
    eleven
    reagent
    waters,
    eleven
    substitute
    wastewater,
    fifteen
    Drinking
    Water,
    and
    thirteen
    wastewater
    sample
    matrices,
    were
    tested using
    a set
    of 4 Youden
    Pair
    concentrations
    for 7
    analyte anions.
    All
    submitted
    individual
    data
    points
    are the average
    of
    duplicate
    samplings.
    Al .2 Calibration
    Linearity
    Al
    .2.1 All laboratories
    used
    a provided
    set
    of 4
    certified, mixed
    anion
    calibration
    solutions
    in
    concentrations
    between
    0.5
    mg/L and
    50
    mgIL,
    formulated
    in
    random concentrations
    given
    in Table
    Al.
    They were
    prepared
    from
    certified,
    individual
    1000 mg/L
    Stock
    Standards
    obtained
    from
    APG,
    lnc, Beipre,
    Ohio.
    No
    dilution was
    necessary.
    Table
    Al:
    Collaborative
    Calibration
    Standard,
    mpIL
    Concentrations
    Analyte
    Anion
    Standard
    1
    Standard
    2
    Standard
    3
    Standard
    4
    Chloride
    50
    25
    0.5
    10
    Bromide
    0.5
    25
    10
    50
    Nitrite
    25
    0.5
    50
    10
    Sulfate
    10
    25
    0.5
    50
    Nitrate
    25
    0.5
    50
    10
    Fluoride
    5
    0.5
    10
    25
    Phosphate
    50
    25
    0.5
    10
    Al .2.2
    A
    Linear Through
    Zero; no
    weighting
    regression
    was
    used
    to calculate
    the
    calibration
    curve.
    The
    range coefficient
    of determination
    (r
    2)
    values
    obtained
    from
    the
    collaborative
    is
    shown in Table
    A2
    Table
    A2: Expected
    Rancje
    of
    (r
    2)
    Coefficient
    of
    Determination
    Anion
    I
    r’
    Average,
    n29
    Lowest
    Highest
    Chloride
    0.99987
    0.99959
    0.99997
    Bromide
    0.99953
    0.99878
    0.99996
    Nitrite
    0.99983
    0.99961
    0.99999
    Sulfate
    0.99976
    0.99901
    0.99999
    Nitrate
    0.99957
    0.99840
    0.99999
    Fluoride
    0.99972
    0.99797
    0.99999
    Phosphate
    0.99982
    0.99942
    0.99999
    Al
    .2.3 EPA
    requires
    that
    1/X
    weighting
    be used
    for
    calibration.
    The
    P
    &
    B
    data
    were derived
    using
    unweighted
    calibration.
    Table
    A2a shows
    there
    is no
    significant
    difference
    in r
    2 linearity
    between
    these
    2
    calibration
    routines.
    Table
    A2a
    Coefficient
    of
    Determination
    r
    2
    from
    a Single
    Calibration
    Analyte
    No Weighted
    lIx
    Weighted
    Anion
    Calibration
    Calibration
    Chloride
    0.99994
    0.99996
    Bromide
    0.99942
    0.99923
    Nitrite
    0.99975
    0.99981
    Sulfate
    0.99971
    0.99974
    Nitrate
    0.99975
    0.99974
    Fluoride
    0.99986
    0.99967.
    Phosphate
    0.99999
    0.99999

    15
    Al .3
    Quality
    Control
    Solution
    Preparation
    Al
    .3.1 The
    Quality Control
    Solution
    (QCS)
    was
    also used
    as the
    Calibration
    Verification
    Solution (CVS).
    Al
    .3.2
    Quality
    Control Solution
    (QCS)
    was manufactured,
    analyzed using ion
    chromatography,
    and
    certified by APG
    as 1 OOX
    concentrate, to replicate typical
    Drinking
    Water concentrations. Required 1:100
    dilution with water before
    analysis.
    The
    QCS
    analyte
    concentrations,
    required
    control limits, and
    interlaboratory
    determined control
    limits based
    upon n# analyses are
    given in
    Table A3.
    Table A3:
    Quality
    Control Acceptance
    Limits
    Analyte
    True Value
    Certified
    Required
    Determined
    Anion
    mg/L
    Value
    99%
    QCS
    mgJL
    Confidence
    Mean ± Std Dev,
    Interval
    n=82
    Chloride
    48.68
    48.61
    ± 0.12
    43.99—
    52.96
    47.64±1.53
    Bromide
    0.00
    0.00
    0.00
    0.00
    Nitrite
    2.87
    2.90
    ± 0.07
    2.39—
    3.26
    2.88 ± 0.19
    Sulfate
    35.69
    35.63 ± 0.25
    29.54
    — 40.53
    35.02
    ± 1.21
    Nitrate
    15.76
    15.78 ±
    0.15
    12.80—
    18.39
    15.33 ± 4.35
    Fluoride
    1.69
    1.68 ± 0.01
    1.49
    — 1.87
    1.67 ± 0.09
    Phosphate
    5.47
    5.55
    ±
    0.12
    4.78—
    6.20
    5.58 ±
    0.28
    Al
    .3.3
    A
    single day’s
    QCS
    was reprocessed
    using
    a 1IX weighting linear
    calibration
    and remained within the
    QC
    Acceptance
    Limits.
    Table A3a QC
    Standard Results:
    Reprocessed
    Using
    lIx Calibration
    Analyte
    No
    Weighted
    lIx Weighted
    QC
    Acceptance
    Anion
    Calibration
    Calibration
    99%Conf Interval
    Chloride
    48.64
    ± 1.06 48.77
    ± 1.07
    43.99
    — 52.96
    Nitrite
    2.93 ± .03
    2.82
    ± .03
    2.39
    — 3.26
    Sulfate
    34.49 ± .79
    34.64
    ± .79
    29.54
    — 40.53
    Nitrate
    15.28±.15
    15.23±.18
    12.80—18.39
    Fluoride
    1.74
    ± .02
    1.63
    ± .02
    1.49
    — 1.87
    Phosphate
    5.75 ± .15
    5.77
    ± .15
    4.78— 6.20
    Al .4
    Youden
    Pair
    Spiking
    Solution
    Preparation
    Al .4.1
    Eight mixed
    anion, 1
    OOX concentrate,
    spiking
    solutions
    were
    prepared
    in
    accordance
    with
    Sec 8.3 (Reagents and
    Materials)
    of the test
    method
    using
    anhydrous
    sodium salts.
    The mg/L
    concentrations
    of
    the
    eight
    standards
    followed the
    approved Youderi
    Pair design
    - 0.5 & 0.7, 2
    & 3,
    15
    & 20,
    40 &
    50
    mg/I
    for all anions
    except fluoride,
    which
    is
    0.5 &
    0.7, 2
    & 3, 7&
    10, 20
    &
    25mgIL.
    The analyte
    true
    value
    concentrations
    were randomized
    among
    the
    eight
    spiking solutions
    as
    described in Table
    A4.
    Al .4.2
    A
    ninth
    solution containing
    approximately
    10
    mg/L
    of each
    analyte was
    diluted
    1:50
    with
    water, and
    was used for
    method
    detection
    limit
    calculations.

    16
    Table A4:
    True Value Youden Pair
    Spiking mci/L
    Concentrations
    Anion/TV
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    Chloride
    0.71
    2.00
    2.98
    14.92
    39.81
    19.91
    49.76
    0.50
    10.20
    Bromide
    2.00
    3.01
    14.93
    39.81
    19.91
    49.77
    0.70
    0.51
    10.49
    Nitrite
    2.98
    39.61
    19.81
    14.86
    49.52
    0.50
    .2.00
    0.70
    9.94
    Sulfate
    39.60
    49.51
    0.49
    0.70
    1.98
    2.98
    14.86
    19.81
    10.23
    Nitrate
    14.92
    19.19
    39.87
    49.78
    0.50
    0.70
    2.00
    2.98
    10.35
    Fluoride
    2.00
    0.71
    0.50
    3.00
    9.99
    6.99
    19.98
    24.99
    10.40
    Phosphate
    49.51
    39.60
    19.90
    0.50
    2.98
    1.99
    0.69
    14.86
    10.48
    These
    solutions, kept at ambient
    temperature, were analyzed before and during
    the
    collaborative
    to monitor for
    accuracy
    and
    stability. The
    mg/L
    True Value
    in
    was used to
    determine
    bias, matrix recovery,
    and
    the
    single
    operator
    and
    interlaboratory
    precision in
    the P
    &
    B tables per the requirement of D
    2777.
    Solution
    3
    and
    7 exhibited some conversion
    of nitrite to nitrate before
    analysis.
    This conversion
    is evident in the
    bias and % Recovery for
    0.5
    mgIL
    and 2
    mg/I
    nitrite and
    nitrate.
    Al
    .5
    Sample
    Matrix
    Preparation
    Al .5.1 All
    participating laboratories provided
    and tested reagent water,
    substitute
    wastewater,
    naturally occurring drinking
    water, and naturally
    occurring
    wastewater. Before
    matrix spiking
    with the Youden Pair
    solutions, the sample
    matrix was evaluated, then appropriately
    diluted to give the highest anion
    concentration
    below
    50 mg/L.
    The
    diluted sample matrix
    was used
    to
    dilute
    each
    Youden Pair spiking solution
    1:100.
    Al
    .5.2
    Reagent Water was used as-is.
    Substitute wastewater
    was
    diluted
    1:20
    with
    water. Naturally occurring drinking water
    was
    used as-is or diluted
    1:5
    with
    water.
    Naturally occurring wastewater
    was diluted between
    1:3 and 1:20,
    except
    one
    which required
    a 1:1000 dilution due
    to high
    chloride.
    Al
    .5.3
    Due to the anion content
    of
    the
    naturally occurring
    drinking
    water
    and “real”
    wastewater
    matrices,
    some of the reported
    spike matrix results exceeded
    the
    scope of this
    test
    method. Linearity and matrix
    recovery data obtained
    from
    the
    collaborative indicated that these
    data are acceptable,
    and
    extended
    the
    useful
    range
    of this test method.
    Al .5.4
    Due to the anion content
    of
    the
    naturally occurring
    sample matrices
    given
    in Table A5,
    the low
    concentration bias and
    recovery may
    be
    misleading
    because of spiking a low anion
    concentration
    increment into a large
    naturally
    occurring concentration of the same
    anion.
    Table
    A5: Blank
    Analyte
    Concentrations for
    Naturally
    Occurring Sample
    Matrices
    Data
    in mgIL
    Chloride
    Sulfate
    Nitrate
    Drinking
    Water
    0.7
    to
    41.9
    0.5
    to
    33.6
    0.2
    to
    6.5
    Substitute
    Wastewater
    20.5 to 25.5
    3.2 to 4.0 Not Detected
    “Real”
    0.9
    to 43.4
    0.5 to 50.4
    0.3
    to
    23.0
    Wastewater

    17
    Al
    .6
    Test
    Method
    Detection
    Limits:
    Al
    .6.1
    Spiking
    Solution #9,
    containing
    10 mgIL of each
    analyte,
    was
    diluted
    1:50 with
    water
    and
    was
    used
    for
    detection
    limit calculations.
    Ten laboratories perlormed
    seven
    replicate
    samplings,
    and
    the mean and
    standard
    deviation from each
    laboratory
    was
    calculated.
    The
    mean time corrected
    peak area
    response
    for the
    7
    replicates was
    given
    the true value of
    the solution #9, and
    from a simple
    proportion,
    the
    standard
    deviation was calculated
    as
    mg/L.
    Std Dev,
    mg/L
    = (True
    Value
    Conc Sol’n #9,
    mq/L)(Response
    Std Dev)
    Ave Response
    of SoI’n
    #9
    Al
    .6.2
    Method
    detection
    limits (MDL) were
    derived
    using
    “pooled”
    EPA protocol
    and
    the
    student
    t-test at 6
    degrees of
    freedom, as follows;
    The
    method
    detection
    limit (MDL)
    =(3.14)(Std
    Dev,
    mg/L).
    Al
    .6.3
    The
    upper
    and
    lower
    confidence
    limits
    were calculated as;
    95%
    Confidence
    Interval:
    LCL
    (Lower
    Confidence Limit)
    = 0.64
    x
    MDL
    UCL
    (Upper
    Confidence Limit)
    = 2.20
    x MDL
    Al
    .6.4
    Method
    Detection
    Limits
    are given
    in
    Table
    A6.
    Table
    A6: Method Detection
    I imif
    Anion
    mgIL
    Solution
    Method
    Detection I
    95% Confidence
    Interval
    Concentration
    MDL,_mgIL
    mg/L
    Chloride
    0.204
    0.075
    0.048
    to
    0.165
    Bromide
    0.210
    0.120
    0.077
    to
    0.264
    Nitrite
    0.199
    0.103
    0.066
    to 0.227
    Sulfate
    0.205
    0.065
    0.042
    to 0.143
    Nitrate
    0.207
    0.076
    0.049
    to
    0.167
    Fluoride
    0.208
    0.032
    0.020
    to 0.070
    Phosphate
    0.210
    0.097
    0.062
    to 0.213

    18
    Table
    1
    Precision,
    Bias,
    and
    Matrix Recovery
    for
    Chloride
    Matrix
    # of
    True
    Mean
    Bias
    vs
    Recovery
    Interlab
    Interlab
    Single
    Analyst
    Values
    Value
    Result
    True
    vs True
    Std Dev
    %RSD
    Operator
    %RSD
    Value
    Value
    S(t)
    Std Dev,
    S(o)
    Reagent
    9
    0.50
    0.55
    0.05
    110.0
    0.11
    19.8
    Water
    10
    0.71
    0.69
    -0.02
    97.2
    0.08
    11.5
    0.05
    7.5
    10
    2.00
    1.97
    -0.03
    98.5
    0.14
    6.8
    9
    2.98
    2.97
    -0.01
    99.7
    0.11
    3.8
    0.05
    2.1
    10
    14.92
    14.76
    -0.16
    98.9
    0.61
    4.2
    10
    19.91
    19.81
    -0.10
    99.5
    0.81
    4.1
    0.48
    2.8
    10
    39.81
    38.58
    -1.23
    96.9
    1.43
    3.7
    10
    49.76
    48.70
    -1.06
    97.9
    1.94
    4.0
    1.36
    3.1
    Substitute
    9
    0.50
    0.46
    -0.04
    92.0
    0.51
    111.1
    Wastewater
    9
    0.71
    0.43
    -0.28
    60.6
    0.69
    160.7
    0.42
    93.8
    9
    2.00
    1.52
    -0.48
    76.0
    0.68
    45.0
    9
    2.98
    2.58
    -0.40
    86.6
    0.63
    24.5
    0.50
    24.3
    9
    14.92
    14.29
    -0.63
    95.8
    1.02
    7.1
    9
    19.91
    18.93
    -0.98
    95.1
    1.24
    6.6
    0.60
    3.6
    9
    39.81
    37.34
    -2.47
    93.8
    5.44
    14.6
    9
    49.76
    47.54
    -2.22
    95.5
    3.13
    6.6
    4.43
    10.4
    Drinking
    12
    0.50
    0.63
    0.13
    126.0
    0.67
    106.1
    Water
    12
    0.71
    0.75
    0.04
    105.6
    0.34
    45.5
    0.40
    57.2
    12
    2.00
    2.15
    0.15
    107.5
    0.51
    23.6
    12
    2.98
    2.95
    -0.03
    99.0
    0.39
    13.1
    0.47
    18.5
    12
    14.92
    14.54
    -0.38
    97.5
    0.71
    4.9
    12
    19.91
    19.09
    -0.82
    95.9
    1.11
    5.8
    0.37
    2.2
    12
    39.81
    38.38
    -1.43
    96.4
    1.56
    4.1
    49.76
    47.97
    -1.79
    96.4
    2.19
    4.6
    1.26
    3.9
    ReaI
    9
    0.50
    0.42
    -0.08
    84.0
    0.34
    81.0
    Wastewater
    10
    0.71
    0.47
    -0.24
    66.2
    0.34
    72.6
    0.26
    59.3
    10
    2.00
    1.56
    -0.44
    78.0
    0.51
    32.7
    9
    2.98
    2.78
    -0.20
    93.3
    0.19
    6.8
    0.37
    17.3
    10
    14.92
    14.29
    -0.63
    95.8
    0.63
    4.4
    10
    19.91
    18.83
    -1.08
    94.6
    0.78
    4.1
    0.46
    2.8
    9
    39.81
    37.01
    -2.80
    93.0
    2.78
    7.5
    10
    49.76
    48.24
    -1.52
    96.9
    3.15
    6.5
    2.54
    6.0

    19
    Table 2
    Precision, Bias, and Matrix Recovery for Bromide
    Matrix
    # of
    True
    Mean
    Bias
    vs
    Recovery
    Interlab
    lnterlab
    Single
    Analyst
    Values
    Value
    Result
    True
    vs True
    Stcf Dev
    %RSD
    Operator
    %RSD
    Value
    Value
    S(t)
    Std
    Dev, S(o)
    Reagent
    10
    0.51
    0.60
    0.09
    117.6
    0.19
    31.0
    Water
    10
    0.70
    0.83
    0.13
    118.6
    0.23
    28.2
    0.10
    14.6
    10
    2.00
    2.06
    0.06
    103.0
    0.14
    6.6
    10
    3.01
    2.88
    -0.13
    95.7
    0.23
    7.9
    0.15
    6.3
    10
    14.93
    15.00
    0.07
    100.5
    0.58
    3.9
    10
    19.91
    19.32
    -0.59
    97.0
    0.97
    5.0
    0.75
    4.4
    10
    39.81
    39.66
    -0.15
    99.6
    1.24
    3.1
    10
    49.77
    50.04
    0.27
    100.5
    2.94
    5.9
    1.61
    3.6
    Substitute
    9
    0.51
    0.67
    0.16
    131.4
    0.19
    28.8
    Wastewater
    9
    0.70
    0.96
    0.26
    137.1
    0.21
    21.8
    0.08
    9.3
    9
    2.00
    2.14
    0.14
    107.0
    0.22
    10.2
    9
    3.01
    2.72
    -0.29
    90.4
    0.35
    12.8
    0.17
    7.0
    9
    14.93
    14.70
    -0.23
    98.5
    0.58
    3.9
    9
    19.91
    18.91
    -1.00
    95.0
    2.62
    13.8
    1.63
    9.7
    9
    39.81
    38.76
    -1.05
    97.4
    1.11
    2.9
    9
    49.77
    48.81
    -0.96
    98.1
    1.52
    3.1
    0.48
    1.1
    Drinking
    13
    0.51
    0.58
    0.07
    113.7
    0.25
    43.4
    Water
    13
    0.70
    0.83
    0.13
    118.6
    0.22
    26.5
    0.14
    19.9
    13
    2.00
    1.98
    -0.02
    99.0
    0.25
    12.5
    13
    3.01
    2.56
    -0.45
    85.0
    0.25
    9.7
    0.15
    6.8
    13
    14.93
    14.63
    -0.30
    98.0
    0.50
    3.4
    13
    19.91
    19.22
    -0.69
    96.5
    1.10
    5.7
    0.77
    4.6
    13
    39.81
    38.97
    -0.84
    97.9
    1.99
    5.1
    13
    49.77
    48.74
    -1.03
    97.9
    1.49
    3.1
    1.13
    2.6
    Real”
    11
    0.51
    0.59
    0.08
    115.7
    0.11
    19.3
    Wastewater
    12
    0.70
    0.78
    0.08
    111.4
    0.19
    24.4
    0.10
    14.0
    11
    2.00
    2.08
    0.08
    104.0
    0.13
    6.3
    12
    3.01
    2.70
    -0.31
    89.7
    0.41
    15.1
    0.27
    11.5
    12
    14.93
    15.16
    0.23
    101.5
    0.90
    6.0
    11
    19.91
    19.46
    -0.45
    97.7
    1.63
    8.4
    1.09
    6.3
    12
    39.81
    40.24
    0.43
    101.1
    2.27
    5.7
    12
    49.77
    49.97
    0.20
    100.4
    2.52
    5.0
    0.91
    2.0

    20
    Table
    3
    Precision,
    Bias, and
    Matrix
    Recovery
    for Nitrite
    Matrix
    # of
    True
    Mean
    Bias
    vs
    Recovery
    Interlab
    Intertab
    Single
    Analyst
    Values
    Value
    Result
    True
    vs
    True
    Std
    Dev
    %RSD
    Operator
    %RSD
    Value
    Value
    S(t)
    Std
    Dev, S(o)
    Reagent
    9
    0.50
    0.62
    0.12
    124.0
    0.16
    26.1
    Water
    9
    0.70
    0.72
    0.02
    102.9
    0.08
    10.5
    0.05
    7.1
    10
    2.00
    1.31
    -0.69
    65.5
    0.25
    19.2
    10
    2.98
    3.11
    0.13
    104.4
    0.17
    5.4
    0.13
    6.0
    10
    14.86
    14.70
    -0.16
    98.9
    0.47
    3.2
    10
    19.81
    19.88
    0.07
    100.4
    0.70
    3.5
    0.27
    1.5
    10
    39.61
    39.90
    0.29
    100.7
    0.88
    2.2
    10
    49.52
    48.24
    -1.28
    97.4
    1.34
    2.8
    1.25
    2.8
    Substitute
    9
    0.50
    0.37
    -0.13
    74.0
    0.22
    59.7
    Wastewater
    9
    0.70
    0.59
    -0.11
    84.3
    0.28
    48.1
    0.21
    43.2
    10
    2.00
    1.25
    -0.75
    62.5
    0.38
    30.8
    9
    2.98
    2.62
    -0.36
    87.9
    0.82
    31.4
    0.43
    22.1
    9
    14.86
    14.40
    -0.46
    96.9
    0.58
    4.0
    10
    19.81
    19.50
    -0.31
    98.4
    1.66
    8.5
    0.81
    4.8
    10
    39.61
    39.97
    0.36
    100.9
    2.02
    5.0
    9
    49.52
    49.09
    -0.43
    99.1
    3.03
    6.2
    2.11
    4.7
    Drinking
    11
    0.50
    0.52
    0.02
    104.0
    0.08
    14.4
    Water
    12
    0.70
    0.74
    0.04
    105.7
    0.17
    23.3
    0.09
    13.5
    12
    2.00
    1.30
    -0.70
    65.0
    0.21
    15.9
    12
    2.98
    2.97
    -0.01
    99.7
    0.14
    4.6
    0.16
    7.4
    11
    14.86
    14.60
    -0.26
    98.3
    0.40
    2.8
    11
    19.81
    19.82
    0.01
    100.1
    0.59
    3.0
    0.26
    1.5
    11
    39.61
    39.35
    -0.26
    99.3
    0.99
    2.5
    12
    49.52
    49.14
    -0.38
    99.2
    1.93
    3.9
    0.64
    1.5
    “Real”
    9
    0.50
    0.55
    0.05
    110.0
    0.13
    24.5
    Wastewater
    10
    0.70
    0.73
    0.03
    104.3
    0.24
    32.9
    0.07
    10.8
    9
    2.00
    1.27
    -0.73
    63.5
    0.18
    14.2
    10
    2.98
    2.99
    0.01
    100.3
    0.19
    6.2
    0.15
    7.0
    10
    14.86
    14.55
    -0.31
    97.9
    0.46
    3.1
    10
    19.81
    19.68
    -0.13
    99.3
    0.71
    3.6
    0.38
    2.2
    9
    39.61
    39.21
    -0.40
    99.0
    1.03
    2.6
    9
    49.52
    47.27
    -2.25
    95.5
    3.50
    7.4
    2.40
    5.6

    21
    Table 4
    Precision,
    Bias, and Matrix
    Recovery for Sulfate
    Matrix
    # of
    True
    Mean
    Bias vs
    Recovery
    Interlab
    lnterlab
    Single
    Analyst
    Values
    Value
    Result
    True
    vs True
    Std
    0ev
    %RSD
    Operator
    %RSD
    Value
    Value
    S(t)
    Std Day,
    S(o)
    Reagent
    9
    0.49
    0.49
    0.00
    100.0
    0.18
    37.5
    Water
    10
    0.70
    0.71
    0.01
    101.4
    0.20
    29.2
    0.05
    8.3
    10
    1.98
    2.04
    0.06
    103.0
    0.19
    9.7
    10
    2.98
    3.09
    0.11
    103.7
    0.24
    7.9
    0.06
    2.5
    10
    14.86
    14.67
    -0.19
    98.7
    0.57
    4.0
    10
    19.81
    19.67
    -0.14
    99.3
    0.73
    3.8
    0.44
    2.6
    10
    39.60
    39.66
    0.06
    100.2
    0.92
    2.4
    10
    49.51
    49.27
    -0.24
    99.5
    1.26
    2.6
    0.49
    1.1
    Substitute
    9
    0.49
    0.38
    -0.11
    77.6
    0.25
    66.9
    Wastewater
    9
    0.70
    0.51
    -0.19
    72.9
    0.08
    16.4
    0.18
    39.3
    9
    1.98
    1.83
    -0.15
    92.4
    0.29
    16.2
    9
    2.98
    2.86
    -0.12
    96.0
    0.31
    11.2
    0.20
    8.6
    9
    14.86
    14.19
    -0.67
    95.5
    1.06
    7.7
    9
    19.81
    19.23
    -0.58
    97.1
    0.97
    5.2
    0.46
    2.8
    9
    39.60
    38.45
    -1.15
    97.1
    1.33
    3.6
    9
    49.51
    47.75
    -1.76
    96.4
    1.43
    3.1
    0.75
    1.8
    Drinking
    12
    0.49
    0.41
    -0.08
    83.7
    0.21
    52.8
    Water
    12
    0.70
    0.41
    -0.29
    58.6
    0.20
    50.3
    0.14
    34.3
    13
    1.98
    1.77
    -0.21
    89.4
    0.53
    30.3
    13
    2.98
    2.68
    -0.30
    89.9
    0.42
    16.2
    0.27
    12.1
    13
    14.86
    14.25
    -0.61
    95.9
    1.11
    8.0
    12
    19.81
    19.31
    -0.50
    97.5
    1.39
    7.4
    1.48
    8.9
    12
    39.60
    38.58
    -1.02
    97.4
    1.96
    5.2
    13
    49.51
    48.43
    -1.08
    97.8
    2.04
    4.3
    1.44
    3.3
    ReaI
    10
    0.49
    0.37
    -0.12
    75.5
    0.39
    106.4
    Wastewater
    11
    0.70
    0.16
    -0.54
    22.9
    1.19
    765.2
    0.47
    179.6
    11
    1.98
    1.57
    -0.41
    79.3
    0.87
    55.4
    11
    2.98
    2.53
    -0.45
    84.9
    0.64
    25.4
    0.24
    11.9
    11
    14.86
    14.69
    -0.17
    98.9
    1.26
    8.6
    10
    19.81
    19.38
    -0.43
    97.8
    0.90
    4.6
    0.57
    3.4
    11
    39.60
    38.74
    -0.86
    97.8
    1.71
    4.4
    10
    49.51
    48.36
    -1.15
    97.7
    1.51
    3.1
    0.47
    1.1

    22
    Table
    5
    Precision,
    Bias, and Matrix
    Recovery
    for
    Nitrate
    Matrix
    #
    of
    True
    Mean
    Bias vs
    Recovery
    lnterlab
    Interlab
    Single
    Analyst
    Values
    Value
    Result
    True
    vs
    True
    Std
    0ev
    %RSD
    Operator
    %RSD
    Value
    Value
    S(t)
    Std Dev,
    S(o)
    Reagent
    10
    0.50
    1.02
    0.52
    204.00
    0.08
    7.4
    Water
    10
    0.69
    0.71
    0.02
    102.90
    0.08
    11.6
    0.06
    6.4
    11
    1.99
    2.83
    0.84
    142.21
    0.23
    8.1
    11
    2.97
    2.89
    -0.08
    97.31
    0.18
    6.4
    0.14
    5.0
    11
    14.91
    14.77
    -0.14
    99.06
    0.44
    3.0
    11
    19.18
    19.77
    0.59
    103.08
    0.64
    3.2
    0.24
    1.4
    10
    39.86
    39.09
    -0,77
    98.07
    1.43
    3.7
    10
    49.77
    48.93
    -0.84
    98.31
    1.72
    3.5
    0.62
    1.4
    Substitute
    11
    0.50
    1.18
    0.68
    236.00
    0.41
    34.9
    Wastewater
    10
    0.69
    0.55
    -0.14
    79.71
    0.30
    55.3
    0.42
    4.9
    10
    1.99
    2.70
    0.71
    135.68
    0.42
    15.4
    10
    2.97
    2.33
    -0.64
    78.45
    1.10
    47.3
    0.39
    15.4
    9
    14.91
    14.29
    -0.62
    95.84
    0.78
    5.4
    10
    19.18
    18.69
    -0.49
    97.45
    1.46
    7.8
    0.25
    1.5
    11
    39.86
    37.70
    -2.16
    94.58
    1.93
    5.1
    11
    49.77
    47.78
    -1.99
    96.00
    2.18
    4.6
    1.62
    3.8
    Drinking
    11
    0.50
    1.06
    0.56
    212.00
    0.19
    18.1
    Water
    11
    0.69
    0.65
    -0.04
    94.20
    0.06
    8.7
    0.12
    14.4
    12
    1.99
    3.05
    1.06
    153.27
    0.39
    12.8
    11
    2.97
    3.01
    0.04
    101.35
    0.22
    7.2
    0.33
    10.8
    12
    14.91
    14.69
    -0.22
    98.52
    0.62
    4.2
    12
    19.18
    20.05
    0.87
    104.54
    0.88
    4.4
    0.46
    2.7
    12
    39.86
    39.31
    -0.55
    98.62
    1.67
    4.3
    12
    49.77
    48.93
    -0.84
    98.31
    1.43
    2.9
    0.78
    1.8
    Real
    11
    0.50
    0.94
    0.44
    188.00
    0.80
    84.7
    Wastewater
    10
    0.69
    0.69
    0.00
    100.00
    0.09
    13.3
    0.39
    47.6
    10
    1.99
    3.00
    1.01
    150.75
    0.38
    12.7
    10
    2.97
    3.01
    0.04
    101.35
    0.20
    6.6
    0.23
    7.8
    11
    14.91
    14.52
    -0.39
    97.38
    0.66
    4.6
    11
    19.18
    19.26
    0.08
    100.42
    0.77
    4.0
    0.77
    4.6
    11
    39.86
    39.13
    -0.73
    98.17
    1.78
    4.6
    11
    49.77
    49.17
    -0.60
    98.79
    2.26
    4.6
    0.93
    2.1

    23
    Table
    6
    Precision, Bias, and Matrix Recovery for
    Fluoride
    Matrix
    # of
    True
    Mean
    Bias
    vs
    Recovery
    Interlab
    Intortab
    Single
    Analyst
    Values
    Value
    Result
    True
    vs
    True
    Std Dev
    %RSD
    Operator
    %RSD
    Value
    Value
    S(t)
    Std 0ev,
    S(o)
    Reagent
    10
    0.50
    0.51
    0.01
    102.00
    11.00
    11.4
    Water
    10
    0.71
    0.73
    0.02
    102.82
    7.90
    8.1
    0.02
    2.9
    10
    2.00
    2.05
    0.05
    102.50
    3.60
    3.7
    10
    3.00
    2.96
    -0.04
    98.67
    4.40
    4.6
    0.09
    3.4
    10
    6.99
    7.02
    0.03
    100.43
    5.40
    5.6
    10
    9.99
    9.79
    -0.20
    98.00
    4.60
    4.8
    0.13
    1.6
    10
    19.98
    19.60
    -0.38
    98.10
    3.80
    3.9
    10
    24.99
    24.51
    -0.48
    98.08
    4.80
    4.9
    0.74
    3.4
    Substitute
    10
    0.50
    0.50
    0.00
    100.00
    0.09
    18.0
    Wastewater
    10
    0.71
    0.71
    0.00
    100.00
    0.09
    12.0
    0.01
    2.3
    10
    2.00
    1.98
    -0.02
    99.00
    0.12
    6.0
    10
    3.00
    2.94
    -0.06
    98.00
    0.10
    3.4
    0.06
    2.6
    10
    6.99
    6.92
    -0.07
    99.00
    0.28
    4.1
    9
    9.99
    9.94
    -0.05
    99.50
    0.46
    4.7
    0.28
    3.3
    10
    19.98
    19.67
    -0.31
    98.45
    0.94
    4.8
    10
    24.99
    24.78
    -0.21
    99.16
    1.09
    4.4
    0.63
    2.8
    Drinking
    13
    0.50
    0.48
    -0.02
    96.00
    0.06
    12.9
    Water
    13
    0.71
    0.68
    -0.03
    95.77
    0.06
    9.5
    0.02
    3.4
    13
    2.00
    1.96
    -0.04
    98.00
    0.08
    3.9
    13
    3.00
    2.90
    -0.10
    96.67
    0.10
    3.4
    0.08
    3.5
    13
    6.99
    6.91
    -0.08
    98.86
    0.25
    3.6
    13
    9.99
    9.91
    -0.08
    99.20
    0.37
    3.7
    0.18
    2.2
    13
    19.98
    19.94
    -0.04
    99.80
    0.68
    3.4
    12
    24.99
    24.27
    -0.72
    97.12
    1.63
    6.7
    1.30
    5.9
    “Real
    11
    0.50
    0.47
    -0.03
    94.00
    0.08
    16.9
    Wastewater
    11
    0.71
    0.68
    -0.03
    95.77
    0.08
    11.7
    0.04
    7.6
    11
    2.00
    1.96
    -0.04
    98.00
    0.12
    6.3
    11
    3.00
    2.93
    -0.07
    97.67
    0.18
    6.2
    0.09
    3.5
    11
    6.99
    6.85
    -0.14
    98.00
    0.26
    3.8
    10
    9.99
    9.56
    -0.43
    95.70
    0.73
    7.7
    0.44
    5.3
    11
    19.98
    20.06
    0.08
    100.40
    1.23
    6.1
    11
    24.99
    25.12
    0.13
    100.52
    1.34
    5.3
    0.32
    1.4

    24
    Table 7
    Precision,
    Bias, and Matrix
    Recovery
    for o-Phosphate
    Matrix
    # of
    True
    Mean
    Bias vs
    Recovery
    Interlab
    Interlab
    Single
    Analyst
    Values
    Value
    Result
    True
    vs True
    Std
    Dev
    %RSD
    Operator
    %RSD
    Value
    Value
    S(t)
    Std
    Dev, S(o)
    Reagent
    10
    0.50
    0.41
    -0.09
    82.00
    0.12
    29.5
    Water
    9
    0.69
    0.51
    -0.18
    73.91
    0.13
    26.6
    0.03
    7.2
    10
    1.99
    1.88
    -0.11
    94.47
    0.16
    8.3
    10
    2.98
    2.76
    -0.22
    92.62
    0.14
    4.9
    0.08
    3.2
    10
    14.86
    14.93
    0.07
    100.47
    0.64
    4.3
    9
    19.80
    19.76
    -0.04
    99.80
    1.00
    5.1
    0.85
    4.9
    10
    39.60
    39.79
    0.19
    100.48
    1.38
    3.5
    10
    49.51
    50.10
    0.59
    101.19
    1.76
    3.5
    0.72
    1.6
    Substitute
    11
    0.50
    0.49
    -0.01
    98.00
    0.15
    30.0
    Wastewater
    10
    0.69
    0.59
    -0.10
    85.51
    0.17
    28.8
    0.13
    24.4
    11
    1.99
    1.92
    -0.07
    96.48
    0.28
    14.6
    10
    2.98
    2.89
    -0.09
    96.98
    0.22
    7.6
    0.18
    7.5
    11
    14.86
    15.31
    0.45
    103.03
    1.74
    11.4
    11
    19.80
    19.78
    -0.02
    99.90
    1.16
    5.9
    0.84
    4.8
    11
    39.60
    39.58
    -0.02
    99.95
    2.72
    6.9
    11
    49.51
    49.19
    -0.32
    99.35
    3.98
    8.1
    2.18
    4.9
    Drinking
    12
    0.50
    0.46
    -0.04
    92.00
    0.14
    30.0
    Water
    13
    0.69
    0.55
    -0.14
    79.71
    0.20
    36.3
    0.07
    13.4
    13
    1.99
    1.89
    -0.10
    94.97
    0.22
    11.9
    13
    2.98
    2.87
    -0.11
    96.31
    0.24
    8.5
    0.07
    2.8
    12
    14.86
    15.09
    0.23
    101.55
    0.91
    6.1
    13
    19.80
    20.28
    0.48
    102.42
    0.96
    4.7
    1.06
    6.0
    13
    39.60
    40.37
    0.77
    101.94
    2.15
    5.3
    13
    49.51
    50.75
    1.24
    102.50
    3.14
    6.2
    1.03
    2.3
    ReaI
    11
    0.50
    0.43
    -0.07
    86.00
    0.17
    39.1
    Wastewater
    11
    0.69
    0.53
    -0.16
    76.81
    0.24
    46.5
    0.12
    25.8
    11
    1.99
    1.72
    -0.27
    85.43
    0.27
    15.8
    11
    2.98
    2.52
    -0.46
    84.56
    0.48
    19.2
    0.30
    14.0
    11
    14.86
    14.93
    0.07
    100.47
    0.91
    6.1
    11
    19.80
    19.90
    0.10
    100.51
    1.35
    6.8
    0.91
    5.2
    11
    39.60
    38.98
    -0.62
    98.43
    1.45
    3.7
    10
    49.51
    48.26
    -1.25
    97.48
    1.80
    3.7
    0.82
    1.9

    All
    data
    determined as spike recovery from ASTM method
    validation and EPA
    Tier 3 Criteria
    Reagent
    water
    (RW) data between
    0.5
    and
    50
    mgIL, except
    Fluoride
    0.5
    and
    25 mg/L
    consisting
    of 4 Youden Pairs
    Drinking
    (DW) and
    Wastewater (WW) data
    between 2 and
    50 mg/L except Fluoride
    2 and 25 mglL
    consisting of
    3
    Youden
    Pairs
    RSD
    = %Relative
    Standard
    Deviation;
    (std dev
    I
    mean)(1 00)
    LL = Lower
    Limit
    of
    %Recovery
    UL
    = Upper Limit of
    %Recovery
    RPD
    = Relative
    %
    Difference between
    MSD
    25
    Table
    8
    QC
    Acceptance Criteria
    Analyte
    Matrix
    Precision
    Average
    Initial
    Ongoing
    MSIMSD
    MS/MSD
    %RSD
    %Recovery
    LL-UL
    LL-UL
    LL-UL
    RPD
    Chloride
    RW
    6.30
    98.5
    90.8- 106.2
    88.7- 108.3
    89.4 - 107.5
    12.0
    DW
    10.00
    97.0
    84.0- 110.0
    81.1 - 1130
    81.9-
    112.5
    18.6
    WW
    7.00
    92.8
    83.0- 102.6
    81.4-
    104.2
    81.8 - 103.8
    13.2
    Bromide
    RW
    10.10
    99.7
    92.2
    - 107.2
    86.7 - 112.7
    88.5
    - 111.0
    19.2
    DW
    12.70
    95.8
    85.9- 105.6
    79.8-
    111.8
    81.8- 109.8
    23.3
    WW
    14.40
    99.2
    87.2
    - 111.2
    80.1
    - 118.3
    82.4 - 116.0
    26.9
    Nitrite
    RW
    6.40
    100.6
    95.1 - 106.0
    91.9- 109.2
    92.8- 108.3
    12.1
    DW
    4.30
    99.6
    92.4 - 106.7
    91.5
    - 107.7
    91.8
    - 107.4
    8.1
    WW
    4.90
    98.9
    91.3-
    106.5
    90.2-
    107.6
    90.5-
    107.3
    9.2
    Sulfate
    RW
    9.40
    100.4
    90.9- 109.9
    86.9- 113.9
    88.2- 112.6
    17.9
    DW
    16.1
    95.6
    82.6- 108.6
    74.9-
    116.2
    77.5- 113.7
    29.7
    WW
    19.60
    95.3
    78.9 - 111.7
    70.1
    - 120.5
    72.6- 118.0
    36.9
    Nitrate
    RW
    8.40
    99.5
    93.1 - 105.9
    88.6-
    110.4
    90.0-
    108.9
    15.9
    DW
    9.40
    100.2
    93.0- 107.4
    88.0- 112.4
    89.4- 111.0
    17.4
    wW
    6.70
    99.1
    90.7
    -
    107.6
    88.6
    - 109.7
    89.2
    - 109.1
    12.4
    Fluoride
    RW
    7.90
    99.5
    92.2-
    106.7
    88.7-
    110.3
    89.8-
    109.1
    14.9
    DW
    4.86
    98.3
    91.9
    - 104.8
    90.5 - 106.2
    90.9
    - 105.7
    9.0
    WW
    7.90
    98.5
    90.0-
    107.1
    87.0-
    110.1
    88.0- 109.1
    14.7
    Phosphate
    RW
    10.60
    98.2
    91.9
    - 104.5
    85.4 - 111.0
    87.4
    - 109.0
    20.1
    DW
    9.40
    100.2
    89.3
    - 111.1
    85.8 - 114.6
    87.0 - 113.4
    17.4
    WW
    16.90
    94.6
    81.5-107.7
    73.5-115.8
    76.1 -113.1
    31.5

    26
    Appendix
    B
    (Non-mandatory
    Information)
    B.l Suggested Background
    References
    Bl .1 EPA
    Method
    6500,
    “Dissolved Inorganic
    Anions in Aqueous Matrices
    by
    Capillary
    Ion
    Electrophoresis”, SW846, Rev
    0, January
    1998.
    Bi
    .2
    Method 4140, “Inorganic
    Anions by Capillary
    Ion Electrophoresis”, Standard
    Methods for
    the Examination of
    Water
    and
    Wastewater,
    20
    Edition, 1998,
    p
    4-12
    to
    4-20.
    Bi
    .3
    Krol,
    Benvenuti,
    and
    Romano, “Ion Analysis
    Methods
    for IC and
    CIA and
    Practical
    Aspects of Capillary Ion Analysis Theory”,
    Waters Corp. Lit Code WT-139,
    1998.
    Bi .4
    Jandik, P., Bonn,
    G.,
    “Capillary Electrophoresis
    of Small Molecules and Ions”,
    VCH
    Publishers,
    1993
    Bi
    .5
    Romano,
    J.,
    Krol,
    J, “Capillary Ion
    Electrophoresis,
    An Environmental Method
    for the
    Determination
    of Anions in Water”,
    J. of
    Chromatography,
    Vol.
    640, 1993,
    p.
    403.
    B1
    .6
    Romano, J., “Capillary
    Ion
    Analysis:
    A Method
    for
    Determining
    Ions in Water
    and
    Solid
    Waste
    Leachates”, Amer. Lab.,
    May 1993,
    p.
    48.
    B1 .7 Jones, W., “Method Development
    Approaches for Ion
    Electrophoresis”,
    J.of
    Chromatography,
    Vol. 640, 1993,
    p.
    387.
    Bi
    .8
    Jones, W.,
    Jandik,
    P., “Various Approaches
    to Analysis
    of Difficult
    Sample
    Matrices for Anions using Capillary
    Electrophoresis”,
    J. of
    Chromatography,
    Vol.
    608,
    1992,
    p. 385.
    Bi .9
    Bondoux,
    G., Jandik, P., Jones,
    W., “New Approaches
    to the Analysis
    of Low
    Level of
    Anions
    in Water”, J. of Chromatography,
    Vol.
    602, 1992,
    p.
    79.
    B1.10
    Jandik, P., Jones,
    W., Weston,
    A.,
    Brown,
    P.,”Electrophoretic
    Capillary
    Ion
    Analysis: Origins, Principles,
    and Applications”,
    LCGC, Vol.
    9, Number
    9, 1991,
    p.
    634.
    Bi .11 Romano,
    J.,
    Jackson,
    P., “Optimization
    of Inorganic
    Capillary
    Electrophoresis
    for the Analysis of Anionic
    Solutes in Real
    Samples”,
    J. of Chromatography,
    Vol.
    546,1991,
    p.
    411.
    Bi .12
    Jandik,
    P., Jones,
    W., “Optimization
    of
    Detection
    Sensitivity
    in the
    Capillary
    Electrophoresis of Inorganic
    Anions”, J
    of Chromatography,
    Vol.
    546, 1991,
    p.
    431.
    B1 .13 Jandik, P., Jones,
    W., “Controlled
    Changes
    of Selectivity
    in the
    Separation
    of
    Ions
    by
    Capillary Electrophoresis”,
    J.
    of
    Chromatography,
    Vol.
    546, 1991,
    p
    445.
    Bi .14
    Foret,
    R.,
    et.al.,
    “Indirect
    Photometric Detection
    in
    Capillary Zone
    Electrophoresis”,
    J.
    of Chromatography,
    Vol. 470,
    1989,
    p.
    299.
    B1 .15 Hjerte’n, S. et. al., “Carrier-free
    Zone Electrophoresis,
    Displacement
    Electrophoresis
    and
    Isoelectric Focusing
    in an Electrophoresis
    Apparatus”,
    J.of
    Chromatography,
    Vol.
    403, 1987,
    p.
    47.
    Bi
    .16 Serwe, M., “New ASTM
    Standard:
    Recommended
    Operating
    Conditions
    for the
    Agilent CE”, Agilent
    Technologies
    Application Brief,
    Publication
    Number
    5968-
    8660E.

    27
    Appendix
    C
    Capillary
    Ion
    Electrophoresis
    Initial
    Demonstration
    of
    Performance
    Single
    Operator
    General
    Inorganic
    Anion
    &
    Organic
    Acid
    Analysis
    with
    Indirect
    UV
    Detection
    Basis
    for EPA
    Method
    6500,
    ASTM
    D6508,
    and
    Standard
    Methods
    4140
    The
    performance
    data
    given
    in
    this
    appendix
    was
    provided
    in
    the
    collaborative
    instruction
    booklet
    to
    evaluate
    initial
    demonstration
    of performance
    required
    by
    the
    collaborative
    design.
    D
    E
    C,,
    Analysis
    Conditions:
    Electrolyte:
    Capillary:
    Temperature:
    Power
    Supply:
    Voltage:
    Current:
    Sampling:
    Detection:
    Time
    Constant:
    Sampling
    Rate:
    Analyte
    MT:
    Quantitation:
    lonSelect
    High
    Mobility
    Anion
    Electrolyte,
    P/N
    49385
    75 .tm
    (Id)
    x 375
    jm (od)
    x 60
    cm
    (length)
    25°C
    (5°C
    Above
    Ambient)
    Negative
    15 kV
    14
    ± 1 jiA
    (Use
    Constant
    Current
    for Analysis)
    Hydrostatic
    for
    30
    Seconds
    Indirect
    UV
    at
    254 nm,
    Hg
    Lamp,
    185
    or
    254
    nm Window
    0.3
    Seconds,
    or less
    20. Data
    Points
    per Second
    Mid-Point
    of
    Analyte
    Peak
    Width
    at
    Baseline
    Time
    Corrected
    Peak
    Area
    (Peak
    Area
    I
    MT)
    6
    3
    4
    PPM
    Standards
    1
    Chloride
    = 2
    2
    Bromide
    =4
    3
    Nitrite
    =
    4
    4 Sulfate
    = 4
    5
    Nitrate
    =
    4
    9
    6
    Oxalate
    = 5
    7
    Fluoride
    =
    1
    8 Formate
    = 5
    9
    Phosphate
    =
    4
    10 Bicarbonate
    11 Acetate
    = 5
    10
    3.000
    3.500
    Minutes
    4.000

    28
    Millennium
    Data
    Processing
    Method:
    CIE
    Processing
    Method
    using
    Mid-Point
    of Peak
    Width
    for
    Migration
    Time
    Integration
    Peak Width
    =
    2.25
    - 3.00
    Threshold
    = 100 ±25
    Mm
    Area
    = 100
    Mm
    Height
    = 50
    Inhibit
    lntg. =Oto3min
    Calibration
    Averaging
    =
    None
    MT
    Window
    = 2%
    Update
    MT
    =
    Average Standards
    Peak
    Match
    = First
    for
    Chloride
    (Cl is always
    first in the
    pherogram,
    use as a
    ref
    peak)
    Cl MT Window
    =10%
    Other
    Analytes
    = Closest
    Quantitate
    By = Time
    Corrected
    Peak
    Area
    Fit Type
    = Linear
    Through
    Zero
    Report
    Analyte
    Name
    Analyte
    Migration
    Time
    Analyte
    Migration
    Time
    Ratio
    (respect
    to Cl Ref
    Peak)
    Peak
    Area
    Time
    Corrected
    Peak Area
    Amounts
    Use
    fresh
    electrolyte
    daily;
    recalibrate
    with
    every change
    in
    electrolyte.
    Clear
    previous
    calibration
    (in
    Quick Set
    Page) before
    recalibration.
    Do Not use
    analyte
    peak
    height
    for
    quantitation
    due
    to
    asymmetrical
    peak shapes.
    Method
    Validation:
    The single
    operator
    performance
    given
    below
    using
    the
    ASTM
    validation
    design is
    intended
    as
    a basis
    to
    evaluate
    Initial
    Demonstration
    of
    Performance.
    Individual
    Youden
    Pair Standard,
    in ppm
    1
    234
    56
    7
    8
    Cl
    0.7
    2.0
    3.0
    15.0
    40.0
    20.0
    50.0
    0.5
    Br
    2.0
    3.0
    15.0
    40.0
    20.0
    50.0
    0.7
    0.5
    N02
    3.0
    40.0
    20.0
    15.0
    50.0
    0.5
    2.0
    0.7
    S04
    40.0
    50.0
    0.5
    0.7
    2.0
    3.0
    15.0
    20.0
    NOs
    15.0
    20.0
    40.0
    50.0
    0.5
    0.7
    2.0
    3.0
    F
    2.0
    0.7
    0.5
    3.0
    10.0
    7.0
    20.0
    25.0
    P04
    50.0
    40.0
    20.0
    0.5
    3.0
    2.0
    0.7
    15.0
    C
    C
    C
    G)
    ct
    C

    29
    Cl
    Cl
    R
    2
    =
    0.9996
    SO
    4
    R
    2
    =
    0.9998
    Br
    R
    2
    =
    0.9995
    Method
    Linearity:
    10
    7.5
    Cs
    52
    CO
    w
    m
    .
    CO
    0)
    CJ)
    0
    2.5
    E
    I-
    0
    10
    7 .5
    Cs
    Cs
    2.5
    0
    10
    20
    30
    40
    50
    ppm Anion
    F
    A
    2
    0.9985
    P0
    4
    A2
    = 0.9996
    P04
    10
    3
    Data Points
    per
    Concentration
    U sing
    Va lid ation
    S ta nda rd
    a
    0
    10
    20
    ppm
    Anion
    30
    40
    50
    7
    .5
    NO
    2
    R
    2
    =
    0.9996
    N0 R
    2
    =
    0.9992
    5
    CO
    Cs
    Cs
    Cs
    0
    0
    Cs
    0
    Cs
    0
    C.)
    Cs
    E
    I-
    en
    0
    C
    Cs
    4)
    0
    I.
    2.5
    N02
    0
    NO
    0
    10
    20
    ppm
    Anion
    30
    40
    50

    30
    Method
    Detection
    Limits:
    D
    2
    [K)
    d
    Minutes
    Seven
    replicates
    of the
    above 100 ppb
    anion
    standard
    were used
    to calculate time
    corrected
    peak
    area
    precision.
    Using
    EPA
    and Standard Methods
    protocols,
    the detection
    limits,
    as
    ppb,
    for these
    analytes are:
    Chloride
    =46
    Nitrate
    =84
    Bromide =90
    Fluoride =20
    Nitrite =72
    Phosphate
    =41
    Sulfate
    =32
    This
    method has been
    validated between
    0.1
    to
    50
    ppm.
    Quantitation
    below
    0.1
    ppm
    is not
    advised.
    100 ppb Anion Standard
    CT
    S04
    F
    N02
    NOa
    P04
    3.60 0

    31
    Migration
    Time
    Reproducibility:
    Use
    mid-point
    of
    analyte
    peak
    width
    at
    the
    baseline
    as
    the
    analyte migration
    time
    determinant.
    Data
    given
    as average
    absolute
    migration
    time
    for
    each
    validation
    standard analyzed
    in
    triplicate.
    Analyte
    Cl
    Br
    N02
    S04
    N03
    F
    P04
    1
    3.132
    3.226
    3.275
    3.405
    3.502
    3.761
    3.906
    2
    3.147
    3.239
    3.298
    3.431
    3.517
    3.779
    3.931
    3
    3.138
    3.231
    3.283
    3.411
    3.497
    3.771
    3.925
    4
    3.158
    3.244
    3.307
    3.434
    3.510
    3.781
    3.963
    5
    3.184
    3.271
    3.331
    3.435
    3.551
    3.787
    3.981
    6
    3.171
    3.260
    3.312
    3.418
    3.537
    3.776
    3.964
    7.
    3.191
    3.272
    3.315
    3.437
    3.544
    3.773
    3.978
    >
    8
    3.152
    3.248
    3.294
    3.418
    3.526
    3.739
    3.954
    Std
    Dev
    0.021
    0.015
    0.018
    0.012
    0.20
    0.015
    0.027
    %RSD
    0.67%
    0.46%
    0.55%
    0.36%
    0.56%
    0.40%
    0.68%
    Average
    Standard
    Deviation
    = 0.018
    mm = 1.1
    sec
    Average
    %RSD
    of Analyte
    Migration
    Time
    = 0.53%
    Quantitation
    Precision:
    Time
    Corrected
    Peak Area
    Precision,
    given
    as %RSD,
    based upon
    3
    samplings
    per
    concentration.
    Analyte
    Cl
    Br
    N02
    S04
    N03
    F
    P04
    0.1
    12.36
    18.89
    16.19
    13.25
    23.13
    9.82
    14.00
    0.5
    10.51
    20.00
    3.90
    2.25
    2.18
    2.03
    7.71
    0.7
    1.23
    13.36
    2.01
    2.95
    0.37
    2.72
    4.41
    2
    0.32
    3.76
    4.14
    1.79
    2.17
    0.73
    1.91
    C.,
    g
    3
    0.63
    1.80
    1.72
    1.70
    0.58
    0.98
    2.70
    C.)
    E
    15
    0.43
    0.27
    0.48
    0.07
    0.36
    0.15
    1.37
    ° 20
    0.45
    0.66
    0.17
    0.13
    0.88
    0.16
    0.81
    40
    0.36
    0.56
    0.36
    0.46
    0.58
    0.47
    50
    0.45
    0.51
    0.48
    0.16
    0.46
    0.46

    32
    Quantitation Accuracy:
    Used
    a Certified
    Performance Evaluation
    Standard diluted 1:100 with Dl water.
    Amounts
    based upon multi-point calibration curve prepared from
    certified standards.
    Analyte
    Cl
    N02
    S04
    N03
    F
    P04
    Performance
    True
    Evaluation
    Value
    43.00
    1.77
    37.20
    15.37
    2.69
    6.29
    Standard
    in ppm
    Official
    Measured
    43.30
    1.77
    37.00
    15.42
    2.75
    6.38
    Anion
    Mean
    Methods
    Measured
    3.09
    0.07
    2.24
    1.15
    0.26
    0.21
    WetChem&IC
    StdDev
    CIA
    Using
    Ave
    CIA
    43.34
    1.64
    37.11
    14.41
    2.64
    6.34
    Chromate
    n=1
    8
    Electrolyte
    CIA/Mean
    1.003
    0.927
    1.003
    0.935
    0.959
    0.993
    CIA/TrueValue
    1.008
    0.927
    0.996
    0.938
    0.981
    1.008
    A
    CIA/True
    Value,
    or Mean
    = 1.000
    indicates
    perfect agreement
    between CIA and
    official
    anion methods.
    Method
    Recovery:
    A Certified Performance
    Evaluation Standard
    (PES) was diluted
    1:100
    with
    Typical
    Drinking
    Water (DW). Amounts
    based upon multi-point calibration
    curve
    prepared from
    certified
    standards.
    Analyte
    CI
    N02
    S04
    N03
    F
    P04
    Drinking Water
    24.72
    ±
    Not
    7.99
    ±
    0.36
    ±
    Not
    Not
    n=3,
    as ppm
    0.18
    Detected
    0.07
    0.05
    Detected
    Detected
    Amount %RSD
    0.73%
    0.91%
    13.3%
    Performance
    43.00
    1.77
    37.20
    15.37
    2.69
    6.29
    Evaluation Std
    DW + PES
    66.57±
    1.74±
    45.19±
    15.42±
    2.62±
    n=3;
    as
    ppm
    0.34
    0.03
    0.17
    0.12
    0.07
    0.31
    Amount %RSD
    0.51%
    1.85%
    0.38%
    0.79%
    2.69%
    5.52%
    %
    Recovery
    97.9%
    98.3%
    100.2%
    98.1%
    97.4%
    88.2%

    33
    Fig. 3
    Electropherogram
    of
    Substitute
    Wastewater
    Fig.
    5 Electropherogram of Municipal
    Wastewater
    Treatment
    Plant
    Discharge
    Fig. 4
    Electropherogram
    of Drinking
    Water
    Fig.
    6 Electropherogram
    of
    Industrial
    Wastewater
    Fig.
    1 Electropherogram
    of
    Mixed
    Anion
    Working
    Solution
    and Added
    Common
    Organic Acids
    Fig.
    2
    Electropherogram
    of 0.2
    mg/L
    Anions
    Used to
    Determine
    MDL
    1
    Chbide=2
    7 F1uoiic
    = I
    3
    4
    2 BrolTicie
    = 4
    8 Formate
    = 5
    3 Nitrite
    = 4
    9
    Phoophate
    = 4
    8
    4Sulfate =4
    loCaboiiate
    5 Ndre
    = 4
    11
    Acetate
    =5
    ±AJLRLI
    I Chloride
    2
    Sronide
    3
    Nftrite
    4
    Sulfate
    S Nitre
    6
    Fluoride
    7 Pho,hate
    5
    C,)
    C
    4
    3.000
    3.500
    4000
    4.500
    Mi,utes
    3.200
    3.400
    Mrrutes
    3.600
    C
    Mbns
    ii
    mo/l_
    120
    0utlon
    1 Chloride
    = 24.2
    2Sulfate
    =3.77
    3
    Phosphate
    = 0.89
    4 Carbonate
    = Natral
    U)
    a
    Mensnmorl_
    fk,0uiton
    1
    Chloride = 20.2
    2
    Sulfate
    =
    7.5
    3Nitrae
    =1.6
    4 Fluoride
    = 0.C6
    5
    Carbonate
    = NatLrat
    3
    S
    4.500
    Anions
    ii
    mO/L,
    rb
    Diution
    1
    Chloride
    = 93.3
    2
    Nitrite
    =
    0.46
    3
    Sulfate
    = 60.3
    4
    Nitre
    =
    40.8
    5
    Carbonate
    = Natrsal
    3
    D
    00
    a
    Anions
    ri
    ma&. te)
    Diution
    I Chloride
    = 2.0
    2 Nitrite
    = 1.6
    3
    Sulfate
    =34.7
    4 Nltre
    =
    las
    5
    Formale
    <
    0.05
    6 Ftrosphate
    = 12.3
    7
    Carbonate
    = Natral
    4
    3.500
    MinUtes
    3.000
    4.000
    4.500
    Mioutes
    4.000
    4.500

    34
    Fig.
    7 Pictorial
    Diagram
    of Anion
    Mobility and
    ElectroOsomotic
    Flow
    Modifier
    CMhod.
    HIebMthllItyAnIon
    (
    “.__j
    (
    Low MobSfty MIon
    ),
    I
    J
    N.otrol. &W.,
    \
    )
    —CAc.D
    soe—).
    1r4.o5on
    Sid.
    Daon
    sia.
    e
    a
    a
    a
    a
    AAA
    Ae
    e
    e
    a eee
    a
    a net
    dase
    n badground
    soibance.
    T1e
    charge in
    soibance
    is
    drectly
    retated
    to Nietyte concaitration.
    Fig. 8
    Selectivity
    Diagram of
    Anion
    Mobility
    Using
    Capillary
    Ion Electrophoresis
    ——sç—y----—-—--—I
    —f
    O
    0.
    0-
    0
    0.
    o
    0.
    OH
    i:i:.
    N&-..-’---v-
    •‘ii+
    N.N
    +
    Fig. 9
    Pictorial Diagram
    of Indirect
    UV Detection
    Migration
    Time
    MT=
    0
    Hkih Mobility
    Low Mohlhtv
    MT >7
    mm
    Anions
    Anions
    Fig.
    10
    General
    Hardware
    Schematic
    of a
    Capillary
    Ion Electrophoresis
    System
    see
    a ee
    AA
    As
    e e
    a
    eee
    ee
    a a
    ee
    eAAA
    As a
    a
    a e a
    e
    a
    e
    e e
    a e
    eAAA
    As e
    e e e e
    e
    e
    a,
    a,
    E

    Back to top